]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blob - ld/ld.texi
elf: Report property change when merging properties
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset ARM
139 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset M68HC11
142 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68K
148 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset MIPS
151 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset S/390
160 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset SPU
163 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset TICOFF
166 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset WIN32
169 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset XTENSA
172 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173 @end ifset
174 @end ifclear
175 @ifclear SingleFormat
176 * BFD:: BFD
177 @end ifclear
178 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
182 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
183 * LD Index:: LD Index
184 @end menu
185 @end ifnottex
186
187 @node Overview
188 @chapter Overview
189
190 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191 @cindex what is this?
192
193 @ifset man
194 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
195 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
196 @c man end
197
198 @c man begin SEEALSO
199 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201 @file{ld}.
202 @c man end
203 @end ifset
204
205 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
207 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
208 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
209 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
210
211 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
212 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
215 @ifset man
216 @c For the man only
217 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
218 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
220 @end ifset
221
222 @ifclear SingleFormat
223 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
225 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228 @end ifclear
229
230 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
233 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
234 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
236 @c man end
237
238 @node Invocation
239 @chapter Invocation
240
241 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
243 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
244 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245 you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
247 @c man end
248
249 @ifset UsesEnvVars
250 @menu
251 * Options:: Command-line Options
252 * Environment:: Environment Variables
253 @end menu
254
255 @node Options
256 @section Command-line Options
257 @end ifset
258
259 @cindex command line
260 @cindex options
261
262 @c man begin OPTIONS
263
264 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266 @cindex standard Unix system
267 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
268 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269 link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271 @smallexample
272 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273 @end smallexample
274
275 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
276 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
280 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
281 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
286 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288 noted in the descriptions below.
289
290 @cindex object files
291 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294 an option and its argument.
295
296 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300 message @samp{No input files}.
301
302 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
303 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
308 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
313
314 For options whose names are a single letter,
315 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317 option that requires them.
318
319 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
320 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
321 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
322 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
323 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
324 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326 output.
327
328 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333 accepted.
334
335 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
337 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338 compiler driver) like this:
339
340 @smallexample
341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
342 @end smallexample
343
344 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
345 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352 @smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354 @end smallexample
355
356 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
357 linker:
358
359 @table @gcctabopt
360 @include at-file.texi
361
362 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
363 @item -a @var{keyword}
364 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
370 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
377 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
378 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
379 interface.
380
381 @ifclear SingleFormat
382 @cindex binary input format
383 @kindex -b @var{format}
384 @kindex --format=@var{format}
385 @cindex input format
386 @cindex input format
387 @item -b @var{input-format}
388 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
389 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
391 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
392 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
393 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
394 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
395 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399 @xref{BFD}.
400
401 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403 linking object files of different formats), by including
404 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
405 particular format.
406
407 The default format is taken from the environment variable
408 @code{GNUTARGET}.
409 @ifset UsesEnvVars
410 @xref{Environment}.
411 @end ifset
412 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
413 @code{TARGET};
414 @ifclear man
415 see @ref{Format Commands}.
416 @end ifclear
417 @end ifclear
418
419 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @cindex compatibility, MRI
422 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
424 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
425 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
426 @ifclear man
427 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428 @end ifclear
429 @ifset man
430 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431 @end ifset
432 Introduce MRI script files with
433 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
434 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
436 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438 @cindex common allocation
439 @kindex -d
440 @kindex -dc
441 @kindex -dp
442 @item -d
443 @itemx -dc
444 @itemx -dp
445 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
451 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
460 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
461
462 @cindex entry point, from command line
463 @kindex -e @var{entry}
464 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
465 @item -e @var{entry}
466 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
475 @kindex --exclude-libs
476 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
478 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
479 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484 be treated as hidden.
485
486 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497 regardless of this option.
498
499 @cindex dynamic symbol table
500 @kindex -E
501 @kindex --export-dynamic
502 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
503 @item -E
504 @itemx --export-dynamic
505 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
506 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
515
516 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519 linking the program itself.
520
521 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
522 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
523 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
524
525 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
529 @ifclear SingleFormat
530 @cindex big-endian objects
531 @cindex endianness
532 @kindex -EB
533 @item -EB
534 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536 @cindex little-endian objects
537 @kindex -EL
538 @item -EL
539 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
540 @end ifclear
541
542 @kindex -f @var{name}
543 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544 @item -f @var{name}
545 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
546 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559 machine specific performance.
560
561 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
564 @kindex -F @var{name}
565 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
566 @item -F @var{name}
567 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
568 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579 @var{name}.
580
581 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
582 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
583 object files.
584 @ifclear SingleFormat
585 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
586 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
587 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
588 environment variable.
589 @end ifclear
590 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591 creating an ELF shared object.
592
593 @cindex finalization function
594 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
595 @item -fini=@var{name}
596 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599 the function to call.
600
601 @kindex -g
602 @item -g
603 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
605 @kindex -G @var{value}
606 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
607 @cindex object size
608 @item -G @var{value}
609 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
612 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
613 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615 @cindex runtime library name
616 @kindex -h @var{name}
617 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
618 @item -h @var{name}
619 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
620 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626 @kindex -i
627 @cindex incremental link
628 @item -i
629 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
631 @cindex initialization function
632 @kindex -init=@var{name}
633 @item -init=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637 function to call.
638
639 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
640 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
641 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
642 @item -l @var{namespec}
643 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
647 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
648 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
649
650 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
651 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657 @var{filename}.
658
659 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
666 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
667 archives multiple times.
668
669 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671 @ifset GENERIC
672 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
673 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
674 behaviour of the AIX linker.
675 @end ifset
676
677 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
678 @kindex -L @var{dir}
679 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
680 @item -L @var{searchdir}
681 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
682 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
684 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
687 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
688 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690 option is specified.
691
692 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
695
696 @ifset UsesEnvVars
697 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
698 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
699 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700 @end ifset
701
702 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706 @cindex emulation
707 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
708 @item -m @var{emulation}
709 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716 configured.
717
718 @cindex link map
719 @kindex -M
720 @kindex --print-map
721 @item -M
722 @itemx --print-map
723 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724 information about the link, including the following:
725
726 @itemize @bullet
727 @item
728 Where object files are mapped into memory.
729 @item
730 How common symbols are allocated.
731 @item
732 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
734 @item
735 The values assigned to symbols.
736
737 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743 linker script containing:
744
745 @smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749 @end smallexample
750
751 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752 option is used:
753
754 @smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758 @end smallexample
759
760 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761 scripts.
762
763 @item How GNU properties are merged.
764
765 When linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
766 .note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated,
767 which are reported in the link map as
768
769 @smallexample
770 Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
771 @end smallexample
772
773 It indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
774 merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
775 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
776
777 @smallexample
778 Updated property 0xc0000002 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
779 @end smallexample
780
781 It indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
782 when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
783 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
784 @end itemize
785
786 @kindex -n
787 @cindex read-only text
788 @cindex NMAGIC
789 @kindex --nmagic
790 @item -n
791 @itemx --nmagic
792 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
793 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
794 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
795
796 @kindex -N
797 @kindex --omagic
798 @cindex read/write from cmd line
799 @cindex OMAGIC
800 @item -N
801 @itemx --omagic
802 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
803 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
804 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
805 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
806 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
807 specification published by Microsoft.
808
809 @kindex --no-omagic
810 @cindex OMAGIC
811 @item --no-omagic
812 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
813 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
814 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
815 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
816
817 @kindex -o @var{output}
818 @kindex --output=@var{output}
819 @cindex naming the output file
820 @item -o @var{output}
821 @itemx --output=@var{output}
822 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
823 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
824 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
825
826 @kindex -O @var{level}
827 @cindex generating optimized output
828 @item -O @var{level}
829 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
830 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
831 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
832 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
833 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
834 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
835 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
836
837 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
838 @item -plugin @var{name}
839 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
840 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
841 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
842 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
843 wish.
844
845 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
846 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
847 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
848 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
849 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
850 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
851 just copy in the newest one.
852
853 @kindex --push-state
854 @cindex push state governing input file handling
855 @item --push-state
856 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
857 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
858 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
859
860 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
861 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
862 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
863 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
864 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
865 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
866
867 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
868 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
869 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
870 something as follows:
871
872 @smallexample
873 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
874 @end smallexample
875
876 @kindex --pop-state
877 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
878 @item --pop-state
879 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
880 flags governing input file handling.
881
882 @kindex -q
883 @kindex --emit-relocs
884 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
885 @item -q
886 @itemx --emit-relocs
887 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
888 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
889 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
890 in larger executables.
891
892 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
893
894 @kindex --force-dynamic
895 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
896 @item --force-dynamic
897 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
898 to VxWorks targets.
899
900 @cindex partial link
901 @cindex relocatable output
902 @kindex -r
903 @kindex --relocatable
904 @item -r
905 @itemx --relocatable
906 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
907 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
908 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
909 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
910 @code{OMAGIC}.
911 @c ; see @option{-N}.
912 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
913 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
914 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
915
916 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
917 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
918 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
919 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
920 with input files in other formats at all.
921
922 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
923
924 @kindex -R @var{file}
925 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
926 @cindex symbol-only input
927 @item -R @var{filename}
928 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
929 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
930 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
931 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
932 programs. You may use this option more than once.
933
934 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
935 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
936 the @option{-rpath} option.
937
938 @kindex -s
939 @kindex --strip-all
940 @cindex strip all symbols
941 @item -s
942 @itemx --strip-all
943 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
944
945 @kindex -S
946 @kindex --strip-debug
947 @cindex strip debugger symbols
948 @item -S
949 @itemx --strip-debug
950 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
951
952 @kindex --strip-discarded
953 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
954 @item --strip-discarded
955 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
956 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
957 Enabled by default.
958
959 @kindex -t
960 @kindex --trace
961 @cindex input files, displaying
962 @item -t
963 @itemx --trace
964 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
965
966 @kindex -T @var{script}
967 @kindex --script=@var{script}
968 @cindex script files
969 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
970 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
971 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
972 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
973 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
974 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
975 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
976 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
977 options accumulate.
978
979 @kindex -dT @var{script}
980 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
981 @cindex script files
982 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
983 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
984 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
985
986 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
987 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
988 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
989 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
990 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
991 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
992 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
993 @samp{gcc}).
994
995 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
996 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
997 @cindex undefined symbol
998 @item -u @var{symbol}
999 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1000 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1001 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1002 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1003 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1004 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1005
1006 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1007 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1008 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1009 instead.
1010
1011 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1012 @cindex symbols, require defined
1013 @cindex defined symbol
1014 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1015 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1016 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1017 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1018 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1019 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1020 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1021
1022 @kindex -Ur
1023 @cindex constructors
1024 @item -Ur
1025 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1026 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1027 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1028 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1029 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1030 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1031 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1032 @samp{-r} for the others.
1033
1034 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1035 @cindex orphan sections
1036 @cindex sections, orphan
1037 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1038 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1039 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1040
1041 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1042
1043 @table @code
1044 @item place
1045 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1046 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1047 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1048
1049 @item discard
1050 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1051 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1052
1053 @item warn
1054 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1055 issue a warning.
1056
1057 @item error
1058 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1059 @end table
1060
1061 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1062
1063 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1064 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1065 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1066 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1067 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1068 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1069 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1070 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1071 in a linker script.
1072
1073 @kindex -v
1074 @kindex -V
1075 @kindex --version
1076 @cindex version
1077 @item -v
1078 @itemx --version
1079 @itemx -V
1080 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1081 lists the supported emulations.
1082
1083 @kindex -x
1084 @kindex --discard-all
1085 @cindex deleting local symbols
1086 @item -x
1087 @itemx --discard-all
1088 Delete all local symbols.
1089
1090 @kindex -X
1091 @kindex --discard-locals
1092 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1093 @item -X
1094 @itemx --discard-locals
1095 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1096 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1097 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1098
1099 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1100 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1101 @cindex symbol tracing
1102 @item -y @var{symbol}
1103 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1104 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1105 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1106 to prepend an underscore.
1107
1108 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1109 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1110
1111 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1112 @item -Y @var{path}
1113 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1114 for Solaris compatibility.
1115
1116 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1117 @item -z @var{keyword}
1118 The recognized keywords are:
1119 @table @samp
1120
1121 @item bndplt
1122 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1123
1124 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1125 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1126 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1127 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1128 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1129 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1130 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1131 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1132 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1133 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1134 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1135
1136 @item combreloc
1137 @itemx nocombreloc
1138 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1139 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1140
1141 @item common
1142 @itemx nocommon
1143 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1144 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1145
1146 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1147 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1148 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1149 using pages of this size.
1150
1151 @item defs
1152 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1153 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1154 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1155
1156 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1157 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1158 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1159 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1160 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1161 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1162 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1163 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1164 these options.
1165
1166 @item execstack
1167 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1168
1169 @item global
1170 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1171 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1172 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1173
1174 @item globalaudit
1175 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1176 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1177 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1178 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1179 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1180 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1181
1182 @item ibtplt
1183 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1184 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1185
1186 @item ibt
1187 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1188 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1189 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1190
1191 @item initfirst
1192 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1193 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1194 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1195 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1196 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1197 objects.
1198
1199 @item interpose
1200 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1201 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1202 libraries not so marked.
1203
1204 @item lazy
1205 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1206 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1207 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1208 Lazy binding is the default.
1209
1210 @item loadfltr
1211 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1212
1213 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1214 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1215
1216 @item muldefs
1217 Allow multiple definitions.
1218
1219 @item nocopyreloc
1220 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1221 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1222
1223 @item nodefaultlib
1224 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1225 should ignore any default library search paths.
1226
1227 @item nodelete
1228 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1229
1230 @item nodlopen
1231 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1232
1233 @item nodump
1234 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1235
1236 @item noexecstack
1237 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1238
1239 @item noextern-protected-data
1240 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1241 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1242 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1243 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1244 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1245 i386 and x86-64.
1246
1247 @item noreloc-overflow
1248 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1249 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1250 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1251
1252 @item now
1253 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1254 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1255 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1256 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1257 called.
1258
1259 @item origin
1260 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1261
1262 @item relro
1263 @itemx norelro
1264 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1265 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1266 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1267 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1268 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1269
1270 @item separate-code
1271 @itemx noseparate-code
1272 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1273 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1274 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1275 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1276
1277 @item shstk
1278 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1279 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1280 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1281
1282 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1283 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1284 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1285 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1286
1287 @item text
1288 @itemx notext
1289 @itemx textoff
1290 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1291 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1292 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1293
1294 @item undefs
1295 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1296 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1297 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1298
1299 @end table
1300
1301 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1302
1303 @kindex -(
1304 @cindex groups of archives
1305 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1306 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1307 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1308 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1309
1310 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1311 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1312 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1313 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1314 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1315 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1316 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1317 resolved.
1318
1319 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1320 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1321 more archives.
1322
1323 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1324 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1325 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1326 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1327 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1328 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1329 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1330 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1331 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1332 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1333 restore the old behaviour.
1334
1335 @kindex --as-needed
1336 @kindex --no-as-needed
1337 @item --as-needed
1338 @itemx --no-as-needed
1339 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1340 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1341 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1342 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1343 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1344 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1345 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1346 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1347 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1348 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1349 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1350 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1351 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1352
1353 @kindex --add-needed
1354 @kindex --no-add-needed
1355 @item --add-needed
1356 @itemx --no-add-needed
1357 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1358 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1359 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1360 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1361
1362 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1363 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1364 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1365
1366 @kindex -Bdynamic
1367 @kindex -dy
1368 @kindex -call_shared
1369 @item -Bdynamic
1370 @itemx -dy
1371 @itemx -call_shared
1372 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1373 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1374 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1375 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1376 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1377 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1378
1379 @kindex -Bgroup
1380 @item -Bgroup
1381 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1382 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1383 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1384 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1385 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1386
1387 @kindex -Bstatic
1388 @kindex -dn
1389 @kindex -non_shared
1390 @kindex -static
1391 @item -Bstatic
1392 @itemx -dn
1393 @itemx -non_shared
1394 @itemx -static
1395 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1396 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1397 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1398 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1399 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1400 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1401 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1402 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1403 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1404 libraries.
1405
1406 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1407 @item -Bsymbolic
1408 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1409 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1410 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1411 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1412 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1413 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1414 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1415 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1416
1417 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1418 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1419 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1420 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1421 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1422 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1423 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1424 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1425 libraries and position independent executables.
1426
1427 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1428 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1429 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1430 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1431 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1432 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1433 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1434 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1435 which support shared libraries.
1436
1437 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1438 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1439
1440 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1441 @item --dynamic-list-data
1442 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1443
1444 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1445 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1446 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1447 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1448
1449 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1450 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1451 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1452
1453 @kindex --check-sections
1454 @kindex --no-check-sections
1455 @item --check-sections
1456 @itemx --no-check-sections
1457 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1458 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1459 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1460 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1461 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1462 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1463 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1464 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1465 option.
1466
1467 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1468 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1469 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1470 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1471 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1472 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1473 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1474 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1475 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1476 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1477 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1478 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1479
1480 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1481 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1482 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1483 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1484 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1485 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1486 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1487 symbols.
1488
1489 @cindex cross reference table
1490 @kindex --cref
1491 @item --cref
1492 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1493 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1494 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1495
1496 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1497 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1498 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1499 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1500 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1501 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1502 symbol are listed.
1503
1504 @cindex common allocation
1505 @kindex --no-define-common
1506 @item --no-define-common
1507 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1508 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1509 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1510
1511 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1512 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1513 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1514 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1515 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1516 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1517 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1518 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1519 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1520 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1521
1522 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1523 @cindex section groups
1524 @cindex COMDAT
1525 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1526 @item --force-group-allocation
1527 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1528 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1529 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1530 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1531 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1532 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1533
1534 @cindex symbols, from command line
1535 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1536 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1537 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1538 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1539 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1540 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1541 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1542 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1543 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1544 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1545 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1546 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1547
1548 @cindex demangling, from command line
1549 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1550 @kindex --no-demangle
1551 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1552 @itemx --no-demangle
1553 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1554 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1555 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1556 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1557 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1558 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1559 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1560 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1561 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1562
1563 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1564 @kindex -I@var{file}
1565 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1566 @item -I@var{file}
1567 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1568 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1569 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1570 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1571 doing.
1572
1573 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1574 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1575 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1576 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1577 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1578 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1579
1580 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1581 @item --embedded-relocs
1582 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1583 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1584 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1585 targets.
1586
1587 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1588 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1589 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1590 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1591
1592 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1593 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1594 @item --fatal-warnings
1595 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1596 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1597 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1598
1599 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1600 @item --force-exe-suffix
1601 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1602
1603 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1604 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1605 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1606 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1607 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1608 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1609
1610 @kindex --gc-sections
1611 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1612 @cindex garbage collection
1613 @item --gc-sections
1614 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1615 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1616 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1617 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1618 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1619 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1620 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1621
1622 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1623 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1624 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1625 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1626 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1627 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1628 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1629 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1630 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1631 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1632
1633 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1634 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1635 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1636 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1637 command in the linker script.
1638
1639 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1640 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1641 @cindex garbage collection
1642 @item --print-gc-sections
1643 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1644 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1645 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1646 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1647 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1648 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1649 line.
1650
1651 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1652 @cindex garbage collection
1653 @item --gc-keep-exported
1654 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1655 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1656 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1657 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1658 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1659 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1660 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1661 ELF format targets.
1662
1663 @kindex --print-output-format
1664 @cindex output format
1665 @item --print-output-format
1666 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1667 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1668 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1669
1670 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1671 @cindex memory usage
1672 @item --print-memory-usage
1673 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1674 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1675 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1676 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1677 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1678
1679 @smallexample
1680 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1681 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1682 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1683 @end smallexample
1684
1685 @cindex help
1686 @cindex usage
1687 @kindex --help
1688 @item --help
1689 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1690
1691 @kindex --target-help
1692 @item --target-help
1693 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1694
1695 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1696 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1697 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1698 @option{-M} option, above.
1699
1700 @cindex memory usage
1701 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1702 @item --no-keep-memory
1703 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1704 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1705 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1706 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1707 while linking a large executable.
1708
1709 @kindex --no-undefined
1710 @kindex -z defs
1711 @kindex -z undefs
1712 @item --no-undefined
1713 @itemx -z defs
1714 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1715 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1716 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1717 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1718 libraries being linked in.
1719
1720 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1721
1722 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1723 @kindex -z muldefs
1724 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1725 @itemx -z muldefs
1726 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1727 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1728 first definition will be used.
1729
1730 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1731 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1732 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1733 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1734 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1735 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1736 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1737 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1738 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1739
1740 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1741 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1742 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1743 a shared library.
1744
1745 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1746 libraries specified at link time are that:
1747
1748 @itemize @bullet
1749 @item
1750 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1751 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1752 resolvable at load time.
1753 @item
1754 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1755 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1756
1757 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1758 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1759 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1760 appropriate memset function.
1761 @end itemize
1762
1763 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1764 @item --no-undefined-version
1765 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1766 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1767 will be issued instead.
1768
1769 @kindex --default-symver
1770 @item --default-symver
1771 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1772 exported symbols.
1773
1774 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1775 @item --default-imported-symver
1776 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1777 imported symbols.
1778
1779 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1780 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1781 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1782 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1783 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1784 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1785 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1786 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1787 inappropriate.
1788
1789 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1790 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1791 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1792 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1793
1794 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1795 @item --no-whole-archive
1796 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1797 archive files.
1798
1799 @cindex output file after errors
1800 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1801 @item --noinhibit-exec
1802 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1803 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1804 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1805 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1806
1807 @kindex -nostdlib
1808 @item -nostdlib
1809 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1810 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1811 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1812
1813 @ifclear SingleFormat
1814 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1815 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1816 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1817 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1818 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1819 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1820 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1821 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1822 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1823 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1824 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1825 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1826 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1827 @end ifclear
1828
1829 @kindex --out-implib
1830 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1831 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1832 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1833 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1834 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1835 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1836 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1837 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1838
1839 @kindex -pie
1840 @kindex --pic-executable
1841 @item -pie
1842 @itemx --pic-executable
1843 @cindex position independent executables
1844 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1845 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1846 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1847 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1848 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1849 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1850
1851 @kindex -qmagic
1852 @item -qmagic
1853 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1854
1855 @kindex -Qy
1856 @item -Qy
1857 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1858
1859 @kindex --relax
1860 @cindex synthesizing linker
1861 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1862 @cindex --no-relax
1863 @item --relax
1864 @itemx --no-relax
1865 An option with machine dependent effects.
1866 @ifset GENERIC
1867 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1868 @end ifset
1869 @ifset H8300
1870 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1871 @end ifset
1872 @ifset XTENSA
1873 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1874 @end ifset
1875 @ifset M68HC11
1876 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1877 @end ifset
1878 @ifset NIOSII
1879 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1880 @end ifset
1881 @ifset POWERPC
1882 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1883 @end ifset
1884
1885 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1886 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1887 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1888 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1889 instructions, and combining constant values.
1890
1891 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1892 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1893 @ifset GENERIC
1894 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1895 family of processors.
1896 @end ifset
1897
1898 @ifset GENERIC
1899 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1900 but ignored.
1901 @end ifset
1902
1903 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1904 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1905
1906 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1907 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1908 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1909 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1910 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1911 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1912 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1913 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1914 @ifset GENERIC
1915 (such as VxWorks)
1916 @end ifset
1917 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1918 run-time memory.
1919
1920 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1921 or symbols needed for relocations.
1922
1923 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1924 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1925
1926 @ifset GENERIC
1927 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1928 @cindex runtime library search path
1929 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1930 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1931 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1932 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1933 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1934 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1935 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1936 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1937 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1938 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1939
1940 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1941 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1942 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1943 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1944 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1945 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1946 file systems.
1947
1948 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1949 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1950 the @option{-rpath} option.
1951 @end ifset
1952
1953 @ifset GENERIC
1954 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1955 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1956 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1957 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1958 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1959 of the input files.
1960
1961 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1962 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1963 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1964 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1965 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1966 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1967 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1968 appearing multiple times.
1969
1970 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1971 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1972 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1973 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1974 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1975
1976 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1977 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1978 supported.
1979
1980 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1981 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1982 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1983 runtime linker would do.
1984
1985 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1986 libraries:
1987 @enumerate
1988 @item
1989 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1990 @item
1991 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1992 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1993 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1994 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1995 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1996 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1997 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1998 @item
1999 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2000 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2001 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2002 @item
2003 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2004 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2005 @item
2006 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2007 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2008 @item
2009 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2010 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2011 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2012 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2013 @item
2014 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2015 @item
2016 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2017 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2018 @end enumerate
2019
2020 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2021 warning and continue with the link.
2022 @end ifset
2023
2024 @kindex -shared
2025 @kindex -Bshareable
2026 @item -shared
2027 @itemx -Bshareable
2028 @cindex shared libraries
2029 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2030 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2031 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2032 undefined symbols in the link.
2033
2034 @kindex --sort-common
2035 @item --sort-common
2036 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2037 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2038 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2039 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2040 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2041 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2042 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2043 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2044
2045 @kindex --sort-section=name
2046 @item --sort-section=name
2047 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2048 patterns in the linker script.
2049
2050 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2051 @item --sort-section=alignment
2052 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2053 patterns in the linker script.
2054
2055 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2056 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2057 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2058 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2059 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2060
2061 @kindex --split-by-file
2062 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2063 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2064 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2065 size of 1 if not given.
2066
2067 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2068 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2069 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2070 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2071 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2072 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2073 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2074 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2075 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2076 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2077 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2078 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2079
2080 @kindex --stats
2081 @item --stats
2082 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2083 as execution time and memory usage.
2084
2085 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2086 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2087 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2088 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2089 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2090
2091 @kindex --task-link
2092 @item --task-link
2093 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2094 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2095
2096 @kindex --traditional-format
2097 @cindex traditional format
2098 @item --traditional-format
2099 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2100 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2101 use the traditional format instead.
2102
2103 @cindex dbx
2104 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2105 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2106 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2107 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2108 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2109 combine duplicate entries.
2110
2111 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2112 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2113 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2114 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2115 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2116 line.
2117 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2118 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2119 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2120 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2121 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2122
2123 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2124 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2125 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2126 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2127 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2128 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2129 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2130 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2131 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2132
2133 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2134 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2135 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2136 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2137 byte of the text segment.
2138
2139 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2140 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2141 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2142 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2143 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2144 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2145
2146 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2147 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2148 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2149 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2150 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2151
2152 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2153 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2154 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2155 values for @samp{method}:
2156
2157 @table @samp
2158 @item ignore-all
2159 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2160
2161 @item report-all
2162 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2163
2164 @item ignore-in-object-files
2165 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2166 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2167
2168 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2169 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2170 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2171 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2172 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2173 command line.
2174 @end table
2175
2176 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2177 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2178
2179 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2180 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2181 can change this to a warning.
2182
2183 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2184 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2185 @item --dll-verbose
2186 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2187 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2188 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2189 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2190 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2191
2192 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2193 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2194 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2195 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2196 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2197 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2198 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2199 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2200 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2201 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2202 @xref{WIN32}.
2203
2204 @kindex --warn-common
2205 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2206 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2207 @item --warn-common
2208 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2209 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2210 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2211 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2212 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2213 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2214
2215 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2216
2217 @table @samp
2218 @item int i = 1;
2219 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2220 file.
2221
2222 @item extern int i;
2223 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2224 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2225 variable somewhere.
2226
2227 @item int i;
2228 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2229 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2230 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2231 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2232 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2233 a definition of the same variable.
2234 @end table
2235
2236 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2237 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2238 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2239 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2240 a common symbol.
2241
2242 @enumerate
2243 @item
2244 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2245 definition for the symbol.
2246 @smallexample
2247 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2248 overridden by definition
2249 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2250 @end smallexample
2251
2252 @item
2253 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2254 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2255 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2256 @smallexample
2257 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2258 overriding common
2259 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2260 @end smallexample
2261
2262 @item
2263 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2264 @smallexample
2265 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2266 of `@var{symbol}'
2267 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2268 @end smallexample
2269
2270 @item
2271 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2272 @smallexample
2273 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2274 overridden by larger common
2275 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2276 @end smallexample
2277
2278 @item
2279 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2280 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2281 encountered in a different order.
2282 @smallexample
2283 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2284 overriding smaller common
2285 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2286 @end smallexample
2287 @end enumerate
2288
2289 @kindex --warn-constructors
2290 @item --warn-constructors
2291 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2292 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2293 detect the use of global constructors.
2294
2295 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2296 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2297 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2298 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2299 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2300 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2301 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2302 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2303 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2304 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2305 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2306 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2307 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2308
2309 @kindex --warn-once
2310 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2311 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2312 @item --warn-once
2313 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2314 which refers to it.
2315
2316 @kindex --warn-section-align
2317 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2318 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2319 @item --warn-section-align
2320 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2321 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2322 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2323 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2324 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2325
2326 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2327 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2328 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2329
2330 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2331 @item --warn-alternate-em
2332 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2333
2334 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2335 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2336 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2337 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2338 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2339
2340 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2341 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2342 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2343 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2344
2345 @kindex --whole-archive
2346 @cindex including an entire archive
2347 @item --whole-archive
2348 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2349 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2350 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2351 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2352 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2353 library. This option may be used more than once.
2354
2355 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2356 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2357 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2358 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2359 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2360
2361 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2362 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2363 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2364 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2365 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2366 @var{symbol}.
2367
2368 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2369 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2370 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2371 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2372
2373 Here is a trivial example:
2374
2375 @smallexample
2376 void *
2377 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2378 @{
2379 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2380 return __real_malloc (c);
2381 @}
2382 @end smallexample
2383
2384 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2385 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2386 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2387 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2388
2389 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2390 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2391 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2392 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2393 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2394
2395 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2396 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2397 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2398 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2399 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2400 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2401 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2402
2403 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2404 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2405 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2406 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2407 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2408
2409 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2410 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2411 @item --enable-new-dtags
2412 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2413 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2414 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2415 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2416 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2417 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2418 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2419 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2420
2421 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2422 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2423 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2424 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2425 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2426 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2427 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2428
2429 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2430 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2431 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2432 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2433 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2434 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2435 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2436 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2437
2438 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2439 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2440 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2441 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2442 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2443 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2444 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2445 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2446 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2447 compressed using zlib.
2448
2449 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2450 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2451 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2452 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2453 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2454 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2455
2456 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2457 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2458
2459 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2460 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2461 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2462 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2463
2464 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2465 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2466 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2467 @option{--help} option.
2468
2469 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2470 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2471 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2472 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2473 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2474 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2475
2476 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2477 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2478 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2479 has been used.
2480
2481 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2482 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2483
2484 @kindex --build-id
2485 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2486 @item --build-id
2487 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2488 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2489 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2490 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2491 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2492 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2493 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2494 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2495 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2496 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2497 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2498
2499 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2500 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2501 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2502 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2503 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2504 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2505
2506 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2507 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2508 @end table
2509
2510 @c man end
2511
2512 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2513
2514 @c man begin OPTIONS
2515
2516 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2517 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2518 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2519 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2520 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2521 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2522 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2523 object file).
2524
2525 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2526 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2527 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2528 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2529
2530 @table @gcctabopt
2531
2532 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2533 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2534 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2535 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2536 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2537
2538 @kindex --base-file
2539 @item --base-file @var{file}
2540 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2541 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2542 @file{dlltool}.
2543 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2544
2545 @kindex --dll
2546 @item --dll
2547 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2548 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2549 file.
2550 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2551
2552 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2553 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2554 @item --enable-long-section-names
2555 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2556 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2557 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2558 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2559 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2560 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2561 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2562 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2563 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2564 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2565 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2566 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2567 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2568 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2569 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2570 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2571 image and not stripping symbols.
2572 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2573
2574 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2575 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2576 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2577 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2578 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2579 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2580 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2581 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2582 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2583 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2584 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2585 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2586 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2587 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2588 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2589 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2590 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2591 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2592
2593 @kindex --leading-underscore
2594 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2595 @item --leading-underscore
2596 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2597 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2598 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2599 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2600
2601 @cindex DLLs, creating
2602 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2603 @item --export-all-symbols
2604 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2605 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2606 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2607 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2608 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2609 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2610 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2611 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2612 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2613 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2614 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2615 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2616 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2617 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2618 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2619 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2620 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2621 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2622 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2623 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2624 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2625 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2626 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2627
2628 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2629 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2630 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2631 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2632 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2633
2634 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2635 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2636 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2637 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2638
2639 @kindex --file-alignment
2640 @item --file-alignment
2641 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2642 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2643 512.
2644 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2645
2646 @cindex heap size
2647 @kindex --heap
2648 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2649 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2650 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2651 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2652 committed.
2653 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2654
2655 @cindex image base
2656 @kindex --image-base
2657 @item --image-base @var{value}
2658 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2659 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2660 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2661 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2662 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2663 for dlls.
2664 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2665
2666 @kindex --kill-at
2667 @item --kill-at
2668 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2669 symbols before they are exported.
2670 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2671
2672 @kindex --large-address-aware
2673 @item --large-address-aware
2674 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2675 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2676 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2677 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2678 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2679 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2680
2681 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2682 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2683 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2684 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2685 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2686 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2687 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2688
2689 @kindex --major-image-version
2690 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2691 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2692 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2693
2694 @kindex --major-os-version
2695 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2696 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2697 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2698
2699 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2700 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2701 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2702 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2703
2704 @kindex --minor-image-version
2705 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2706 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2707 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2708
2709 @kindex --minor-os-version
2710 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2711 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2712 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2713
2714 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2715 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2716 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2717 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2718
2719 @cindex DEF files, creating
2720 @cindex DLLs, creating
2721 @kindex --output-def
2722 @item --output-def @var{file}
2723 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2724 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2725 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2726 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2727 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2728 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2729
2730 @cindex DLLs, creating
2731 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2732 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2733 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2734 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2735 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2736 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2737 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2738 execution are avoided.
2739 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2740
2741 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2742 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2743 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2744 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2745 default.
2746 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2747
2748 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2749 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2750 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2751 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2752 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2753 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2754 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2755 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2756 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2757 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2758
2759 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2760 @item --enable-auto-import
2761 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2762 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2763 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2764 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2765
2766 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2767 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2768
2769 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2770 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2771 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2772
2773 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2774 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2775 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2776 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2777 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2778
2779 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2780 see this message:
2781
2782 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2783 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2784
2785 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2786 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2787 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2788 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2789 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2790 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2791 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2792 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2793 the warning, and exit.
2794
2795 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2796 data type of the exported variable:
2797
2798 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2799 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2800 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2801
2802 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2803 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2804 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2805 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2806
2807 @example
2808 extern type extern_array[];
2809 extern_array[1] -->
2810 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2811 @end example
2812
2813 or
2814
2815 @example
2816 extern type extern_array[];
2817 extern_array[1] -->
2818 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2819 @end example
2820
2821 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2822 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2823
2824 @example
2825 extern struct s extern_struct;
2826 extern_struct.field -->
2827 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2828 @end example
2829
2830 or
2831
2832 @example
2833 extern long long extern_ll;
2834 extern_ll -->
2835 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2836 @end example
2837
2838 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2839 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2840 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2841 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2842 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2843 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2844 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2845 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2846
2847 Original:
2848 @example
2849 --foo.h
2850 extern int arr[];
2851 --foo.c
2852 #include "foo.h"
2853 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2854 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2855 @}
2856 @end example
2857
2858 Solution 1:
2859 @example
2860 --foo.h
2861 extern int arr[];
2862 --foo.c
2863 #include "foo.h"
2864 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2865 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2866 volatile int *parr = arr;
2867 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2868 @}
2869 @end example
2870
2871 Solution 2:
2872 @example
2873 --foo.h
2874 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2875 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2876 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2877 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2878 #else
2879 #define FOO_IMPORT
2880 #endif
2881 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2882 --foo.c
2883 #include "foo.h"
2884 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2885 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2886 @}
2887 @end example
2888
2889 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2890 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2891 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2892 functions).
2893
2894 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2895 @item --disable-auto-import
2896 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2897 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2898 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2899
2900 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2901 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2902 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2903 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2904 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2905 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2906 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2907
2908 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2909 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2910 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
2911 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2912
2913 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2914 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2915 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2916 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2917
2918 @kindex --section-alignment
2919 @item --section-alignment
2920 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2921 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2922 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2923
2924 @cindex stack size
2925 @kindex --stack
2926 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2927 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2928 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2929 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2930 committed.
2931 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2932
2933 @kindex --subsystem
2934 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2935 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2936 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2937 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2938 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2939 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2940 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2941 @var{which}.
2942 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2943
2944 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2945 of the PE file header:
2946 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2947
2948 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2949 @item --high-entropy-va
2950 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2951 (ASLR).
2952
2953 @kindex --dynamicbase
2954 @item --dynamicbase
2955 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2956 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2957 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2958
2959 @kindex --forceinteg
2960 @item --forceinteg
2961 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2962
2963 @kindex --nxcompat
2964 @item --nxcompat
2965 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2966 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2967
2968 @kindex --no-isolation
2969 @item --no-isolation
2970 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2971
2972 @kindex --no-seh
2973 @item --no-seh
2974 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2975 this image.
2976
2977 @kindex --no-bind
2978 @item --no-bind
2979 Do not bind this image.
2980
2981 @kindex --wdmdriver
2982 @item --wdmdriver
2983 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2984
2985 @kindex --tsaware
2986 @item --tsaware
2987 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2988
2989 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2990 @item --insert-timestamp
2991 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2992 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2993 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2994 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2995 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2996 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2997 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2998 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2999 identically.
3000 @end table
3001
3002 @c man end
3003
3004 @ifset C6X
3005 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3006
3007 @c man begin OPTIONS
3008
3009 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3010 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3011 all executables use an index of 0.
3012
3013 @table @gcctabopt
3014
3015 @kindex --dsbt-size
3016 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3017 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3018 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3019 entries.
3020
3021 @kindex --dsbt-index
3022 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3023 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3024 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3025 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3026 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3027
3028 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3029 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3030 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3031
3032 @end table
3033
3034 @c man end
3035 @end ifset
3036
3037 @ifset CSKY
3038 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3039
3040 @c man begin OPTIONS
3041
3042 @table @gcctabopt
3043
3044 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3045 @item --branch-stub
3046 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3047 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3048 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3049 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3050 the compiler or assembler.
3051
3052 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3053 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3054 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3055 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3056 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3057 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3058 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3059 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3060 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3061
3062 @end table
3063
3064 @c man end
3065 @end ifset
3066
3067 @ifset M68HC11
3068 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3069
3070 @c man begin OPTIONS
3071
3072 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3073 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3074
3075 @table @gcctabopt
3076
3077 @kindex --no-trampoline
3078 @item --no-trampoline
3079 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3080 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3081 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3082
3083 @kindex --bank-window
3084 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3085 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3086 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3087 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3088 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3089
3090 @end table
3091
3092 @c man end
3093 @end ifset
3094
3095 @ifset M68K
3096 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3097
3098 @c man begin OPTIONS
3099
3100 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3101 when linking for 68K targets.
3102
3103 @table @gcctabopt
3104
3105 @kindex --got
3106 @item --got=@var{type}
3107 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3108 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3109 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3110 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3111
3112 @end table
3113
3114 @c man end
3115 @end ifset
3116
3117 @ifset MIPS
3118 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3119
3120 @c man begin OPTIONS
3121
3122 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3123 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3124 linking for MIPS targets.
3125
3126 @table @gcctabopt
3127
3128 @kindex --insn32
3129 @item --insn32
3130 @kindex --no-insn32
3131 @itemx --no-insn32
3132 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3133 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3134 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3135 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3136 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3137 possible.
3138
3139 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3140 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3141 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3142 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3143 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3144 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3145 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3146 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3147 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3148 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3149 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3150 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3151 an error.
3152
3153 @end table
3154
3155 @c man end
3156 @end ifset
3157
3158 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3159 @node Environment
3160 @section Environment Variables
3161
3162 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3163
3164 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3165 @ifclear SingleFormat
3166 @code{GNUTARGET},
3167 @end ifclear
3168 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3169
3170 @ifclear SingleFormat
3171 @kindex GNUTARGET
3172 @cindex default input format
3173 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3174 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3175 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3176 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3177 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3178 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3179 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3180 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3181 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3182 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3183 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3184 @end ifclear
3185
3186 @kindex LDEMULATION
3187 @cindex default emulation
3188 @cindex emulation, default
3189 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3190 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3191 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3192 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3193 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3194 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3195 linker was configured.
3196
3197 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3198 @cindex demangling, default
3199 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3200 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3201 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3202 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3203 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3204 options.
3205
3206 @c man end
3207 @end ifset
3208
3209 @node Scripts
3210 @chapter Linker Scripts
3211
3212 @cindex scripts
3213 @cindex linker scripts
3214 @cindex command files
3215 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3216 written in the linker command language.
3217
3218 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3219 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3220 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3221 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3222 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3223 described below.
3224
3225 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3226 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3227 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3228 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3229 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3230
3231 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3232 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3233 default linker script.
3234
3235 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3236 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3237 Linker Scripts}.
3238
3239 @menu
3240 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3241 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3242 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3243 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3244 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3245 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3246 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3247 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3248 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3249 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3250 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3251 @end menu
3252
3253 @node Basic Script Concepts
3254 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3255 @cindex linker script concepts
3256 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3257 describe the linker script language.
3258
3259 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3260 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3261 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3262 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3263 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3264 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3265 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3266 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3267
3268 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3269 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3270 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3271 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3272 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3273 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3274 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3275 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3276 of debugging information.
3277
3278 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3279 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3280 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3281 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3282 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3283 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3284 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3285 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3286 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3287 RAM address would be the VMA.
3288
3289 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3290 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3291
3292 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3293 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3294 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3295 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3296 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3297 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3298 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3299
3300 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3301 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3302 option.
3303
3304 @node Script Format
3305 @section Linker Script Format
3306 @cindex linker script format
3307 Linker scripts are text files.
3308
3309 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3310 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3311 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3312 generally ignored.
3313
3314 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3315 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3316 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3317 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3318 file name.
3319
3320 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3321 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3322 to whitespace.
3323
3324 @node Simple Example
3325 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3326 @cindex linker script example
3327 @cindex example of linker script
3328 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3329
3330 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3331 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3332 memory layout of the output file.
3333
3334 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3335 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3336 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3337 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3338 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3339 your input files.
3340
3341 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3342 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3343 linker script which will do that:
3344 @smallexample
3345 SECTIONS
3346 @{
3347 . = 0x10000;
3348 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3349 . = 0x8000000;
3350 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3351 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3352 @}
3353 @end smallexample
3354
3355 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3356 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3357 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3358
3359 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3360 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3361 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3362 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3363 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3364 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3365 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3366
3367 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3368 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3369 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3370 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3371 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3372 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3373
3374 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3375 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3376 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3377
3378 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3379 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3380 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3381 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3382 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3383 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3384 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3385
3386 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3387 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3388 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3389 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3390 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3391 sections.
3392
3393 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3394
3395 @node Simple Commands
3396 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3397 @cindex linker script simple commands
3398 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3399
3400 @menu
3401 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3402 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3403 @ifclear SingleFormat
3404 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3405 @end ifclear
3406
3407 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3408 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3409 @end menu
3410
3411 @node Entry Point
3412 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3413 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3414 @cindex start of execution
3415 @cindex first instruction
3416 @cindex entry point
3417 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3418 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3419 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3420 @smallexample
3421 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3422 @end smallexample
3423
3424 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3425 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3426 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3427 @itemize @bullet
3428 @item
3429 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3430 @item
3431 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3432 @item
3433 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3434 targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3435 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3436 @item
3437 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3438 @item
3439 The address @code{0}.
3440 @end itemize
3441
3442 @node File Commands
3443 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3444 @cindex linker script file commands
3445 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3446
3447 @table @code
3448 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3449 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3450 @cindex including a linker script
3451 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3452 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3453 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3454 10 levels deep.
3455
3456 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3457 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3458
3459 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3460 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3461 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3462 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3463 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3464 @cindex linker script input object files
3465 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3466 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3467
3468 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3469 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3470 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3471
3472 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3473 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3474
3475 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3476 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3477 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3478 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3479 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3480 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3481 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3482 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3483 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3484 @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3485
3486 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3487 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3488 @samp{-l}.
3489
3490 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3491 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3492 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3493
3494 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3495 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3496 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3497 @cindex grouping input files
3498 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3499 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3500 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3501 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3502
3503 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3504 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3505 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3506 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3507 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3508 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3509 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3510 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3511 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3512 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3513 setting afterwards.
3514
3515 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3516 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3517 @cindex output file name in linker script
3518 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3519 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3520 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3521 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3522 precedence.
3523
3524 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3525 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3526
3527 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3528 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3529 @cindex library search path in linker script
3530 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3531 @cindex search path in linker script
3532 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3533 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3534 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3535 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3536 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3537 the command-line option are searched first.
3538
3539 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3540 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3541 @cindex first input file
3542 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3543 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3544 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3545 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3546 first file.
3547 @end table
3548
3549 @ifclear SingleFormat
3550 @node Format Commands
3551 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3552 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3553
3554 @table @code
3555 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3556 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3557 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3558 @cindex output file format in linker script
3559 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3560 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3561 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3562 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3563 line option takes precedence.
3564
3565 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3566 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3567 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3568 desired endianness.
3569
3570 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3571 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3572 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3573 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3574
3575 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3576 command:
3577 @smallexample
3578 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3579 @end smallexample
3580 This says that the default format for the output file is
3581 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3582 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3583 format.
3584
3585 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3586 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3587 @cindex input file format in linker script
3588 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3589 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3590 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3591 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3592 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3593 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3594 @end table
3595 @end ifclear
3596
3597 @node REGION_ALIAS
3598 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3599 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3600 @cindex region alias
3601 @cindex region names
3602
3603 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3604 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3605
3606 @smallexample
3607 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3608 @end smallexample
3609
3610 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3611 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3612 to memory regions. An example follows.
3613
3614 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3615 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3616 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3617 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3618 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3619 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3620 sections:
3621
3622 @itemize @bullet
3623 @item
3624 @code{.text} program code;
3625 @item
3626 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3627 @item
3628 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3629 @item
3630 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3631 @end itemize
3632
3633 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3634 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3635 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3636 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3637 @code{C}:
3638 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3639 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3640 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3641 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3642 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3643 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3644 @end multitable
3645 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3646 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3647 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3648 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3649
3650 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3651 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3652 memory layout:
3653 @smallexample
3654 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3655
3656 SECTIONS
3657 @{
3658 .text :
3659 @{
3660 *(.text)
3661 @} > REGION_TEXT
3662 .rodata :
3663 @{
3664 *(.rodata)
3665 rodata_end = .;
3666 @} > REGION_RODATA
3667 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3668 @{
3669 data_start = .;
3670 *(.data)
3671 @} > REGION_DATA
3672 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3673 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3674 .bss :
3675 @{
3676 *(.bss)
3677 @} > REGION_BSS
3678 @}
3679 @end smallexample
3680
3681 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3682 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3683 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3684 @table @code
3685 @item A
3686 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3687 @smallexample
3688 MEMORY
3689 @{
3690 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3691 @}
3692
3693 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3694 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3695 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3696 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3697 @end smallexample
3698 @item B
3699 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3700 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3701 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3702 @smallexample
3703 MEMORY
3704 @{
3705 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3706 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3707 @}
3708
3709 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3710 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3711 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3712 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3713 @end smallexample
3714 @item C
3715 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3716 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3717 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3718 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3719 @smallexample
3720 MEMORY
3721 @{
3722 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3723 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3724 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3725 @}
3726
3727 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3728 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3729 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3730 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3731 @end smallexample
3732 @end table
3733
3734 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3735 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3736 necessary:
3737 @smallexample
3738 #include <string.h>
3739
3740 extern char data_start [];
3741 extern char data_size [];
3742 extern char data_load_start [];
3743
3744 void copy_data(void)
3745 @{
3746 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3747 @{
3748 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3749 @}
3750 @}
3751 @end smallexample
3752
3753 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3754 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3755 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3756
3757 @table @code
3758 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3759 @kindex ASSERT
3760 @cindex assertion in linker script
3761 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3762 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3763
3764 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3765 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3766 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3767 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3768 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3769
3770 @smallexample
3771 .stack :
3772 @{
3773 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3774 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3775 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3776 @}
3777 @end smallexample
3778
3779 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3780 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3781 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3782
3783 @smallexample
3784 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3785 .stack :
3786 @{
3787 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3788 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3789 @}
3790 @end smallexample
3791
3792 will work.
3793
3794 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3795 @kindex EXTERN
3796 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3797 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3798 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3799 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3800 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3801 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3802
3803 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3804 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3805 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3806 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3807 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3808 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3809
3810 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3811 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3812 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3813 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3814 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3815 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3816
3817 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3818 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3819 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3820 @cindex section groups
3821 @cindex COMDAT
3822 This command has the same effect as the
3823 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3824 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3825 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3826 specified (@samp{-r}).
3827
3828 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3829 @kindex INSERT
3830 @cindex insert user script into default script
3831 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3832 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3833 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3834 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3835 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3836 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3837 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3838 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3839 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3840 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3841 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3842 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3843 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3844
3845 @smallexample
3846 SECTIONS
3847 @{
3848 OVERLAY :
3849 @{
3850 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3851 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3852 @}
3853 @}
3854 INSERT AFTER .text;
3855 @end smallexample
3856
3857 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3858 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3859 @cindex cross references
3860 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3861 references among certain output sections.
3862
3863 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3864 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3865 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3866 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3867 a function defined in the other section.
3868
3869 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3870 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3871 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3872 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3873 names.
3874
3875 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3876 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3877 @cindex cross references
3878 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3879 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3880
3881 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3882 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3883 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3884 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3885 must never call back.
3886
3887 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3888 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3889 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3890 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3891 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3892 names, not input section names.
3893
3894 @ifclear SingleFormat
3895 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3896 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3897 @cindex machine architecture
3898 @cindex architecture
3899 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3900 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3901 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3902 the @samp{-f} option.
3903 @end ifclear
3904
3905 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3906 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3907 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3908 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3909 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3910 @xref{Expression Section}.
3911 @end table
3912
3913 @node Assignments
3914 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3915 @cindex assignment in scripts
3916 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3917 @cindex variables, defining
3918 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3919 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3920
3921 @menu
3922 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3923 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3924 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3925 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3926 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3927 @end menu
3928
3929 @node Simple Assignments
3930 @subsection Simple Assignments
3931
3932 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3933
3934 @table @code
3935 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3936 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3937 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3938 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3939 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3940 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3941 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3942 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3943 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3944 @end table
3945
3946 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3947 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3948 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3949
3950 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3951 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3952
3953 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3954
3955 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3956
3957 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3958 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3959 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3960
3961 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3962 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3963
3964 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3965 assignments may be used:
3966
3967 @smallexample
3968 floating_point = 0;
3969 SECTIONS
3970 @{
3971 .text :
3972 @{
3973 *(.text)
3974 _etext = .;
3975 @}
3976 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3977 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3978 @}
3979 @end smallexample
3980 @noindent
3981 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3982 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3983 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3984 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3985 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3986
3987 @node HIDDEN
3988 @subsection HIDDEN
3989 @cindex HIDDEN
3990 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3991 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3992
3993 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3994 @code{HIDDEN}:
3995
3996 @smallexample
3997 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3998 SECTIONS
3999 @{
4000 .text :
4001 @{
4002 *(.text)
4003 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4004 @}
4005 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4006 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4007 @}
4008 @end smallexample
4009 @noindent
4010 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4011
4012 @node PROVIDE
4013 @subsection PROVIDE
4014 @cindex PROVIDE
4015 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4016 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4017 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4018 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4019 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4020 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4021 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4022 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4023
4024 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4025 @smallexample
4026 SECTIONS
4027 @{
4028 .text :
4029 @{
4030 *(.text)
4031 _etext = .;
4032 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4033 @}
4034 @}
4035 @end smallexample
4036
4037 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4038 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4039 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4040 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4041 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4042 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4043
4044 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4045 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4046 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4047 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4048 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4049
4050 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4051 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4052 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4053 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4054 hidden and won't be exported.
4055
4056 @node Source Code Reference
4057 @subsection Source Code Reference
4058
4059 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4060 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4061 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4062 symbol that does not have a value.
4063
4064 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4065 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4066 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4067 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4068 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4069 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4070 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4071 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4072
4073 @smallexample
4074 extern int foo;
4075 @end smallexample
4076
4077 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4078
4079 @smallexample
4080 _foo = 1000;
4081 @end smallexample
4082
4083 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4084 transformation has taken place.
4085
4086 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4087 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4088 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4089 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4090 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4091 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4092 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4093
4094 @smallexample
4095 int foo = 1000;
4096 @end smallexample
4097
4098 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4099 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4100 number 1000 is initially stored.
4101
4102 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4103 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4104 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4105 So:
4106
4107 @smallexample
4108 foo = 1;
4109 @end smallexample
4110
4111 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4112 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4113 address. Whereas:
4114
4115 @smallexample
4116 int * a = & foo;
4117 @end smallexample
4118
4119 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4120 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4121 the variable @samp{a}.
4122
4123 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4124 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4125 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4126
4127 @smallexample
4128 foo = 1000;
4129 @end smallexample
4130
4131 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4132 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4133 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4134 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4135 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4136
4137 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4138 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4139 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4140 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4141 linker script contains these declarations:
4142
4143 @smallexample
4144 @group
4145 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4146 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4147 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4148 @end group
4149 @end smallexample
4150
4151 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4152
4153 @smallexample
4154 @group
4155 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4156
4157 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4158 @end group
4159 @end smallexample
4160
4161 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4162 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4163 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4164
4165 @smallexample
4166 @group
4167 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4168
4169 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4170 @end group
4171 @end smallexample
4172
4173 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4174 operators.
4175
4176 @node SECTIONS
4177 @section SECTIONS Command
4178 @kindex SECTIONS
4179 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4180 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4181
4182 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4183 @smallexample
4184 SECTIONS
4185 @{
4186 @var{sections-command}
4187 @var{sections-command}
4188 @dots{}
4189 @}
4190 @end smallexample
4191
4192 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4193
4194 @itemize @bullet
4195 @item
4196 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4197 @item
4198 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4199 @item
4200 an output section description
4201 @item
4202 an overlay description
4203 @end itemize
4204
4205 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4206 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4207 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4208 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4209 the layout of the output file.
4210
4211 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4212 below.
4213
4214 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4215 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4216 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4217 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4218 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4219 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4220
4221 @menu
4222 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4223 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4224 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4225 * Input Section:: Input section description
4226 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4227 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4228 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4229 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4230 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4231 @end menu
4232
4233 @node Output Section Description
4234 @subsection Output Section Description
4235 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4236 @smallexample
4237 @group
4238 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4239 [AT(@var{lma})]
4240 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4241 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4242 [@var{constraint}]
4243 @{
4244 @var{output-section-command}
4245 @var{output-section-command}
4246 @dots{}
4247 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4248 @end group
4249 @end smallexample
4250
4251 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4252
4253 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4254 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4255 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4256 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4257 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4258
4259 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4260
4261 @itemize @bullet
4262 @item
4263 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4264 @item
4265 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4266 @item
4267 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4268 @item
4269 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4270 @end itemize
4271
4272 @node Output Section Name
4273 @subsection Output Section Name
4274 @cindex name, section
4275 @cindex section name
4276 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4277 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4278 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4279 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4280 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4281 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4282 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4283 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4284 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4285 commas must be quoted.
4286
4287 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4288 Discarding}.
4289
4290 @node Output Section Address
4291 @subsection Output Section Address
4292 @cindex address, section
4293 @cindex section address
4294 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4295 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4296 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4297
4298 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4299 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4300 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4301 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4302 contained within the output section.
4303
4304 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4305
4306 @itemize @bullet
4307 @item
4308 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4309 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4310 in that region.
4311
4312 @item
4313 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4314 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4315 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4316 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4317
4318 @item
4319 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4320 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4321 counter.
4322 @end itemize
4323
4324 @noindent
4325 For example:
4326
4327 @smallexample
4328 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4329 @end smallexample
4330
4331 @noindent
4332 and
4333
4334 @smallexample
4335 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4336 @end smallexample
4337
4338 @noindent
4339 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4340 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4341 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4342 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4343 input sections.
4344
4345 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4346 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4347 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4348 do something like this:
4349 @smallexample
4350 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4351 @end smallexample
4352 @noindent
4353 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4354 aligned upward to the specified value.
4355
4356 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4357 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4358 sections are ignored).
4359
4360 @node Input Section
4361 @subsection Input Section Description
4362 @cindex input sections
4363 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4364 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4365
4366 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4367 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4368 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4369 map the input files into your memory layout.
4370
4371 @menu
4372 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4373 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4374 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4375 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4376 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4377 @end menu
4378
4379 @node Input Section Basics
4380 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4381 @cindex input section basics
4382 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4383 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4384
4385 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4386 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4387
4388 The most common input section description is to include all input
4389 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4390 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4391 @smallexample
4392 *(.text)
4393 @end smallexample
4394 @noindent
4395 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4396 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4397 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4398 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4399 example:
4400 @smallexample
4401 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4402 @end smallexample
4403 @noindent
4404 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4405 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4406 placed inside the section list, for example:
4407 @smallexample
4408 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4409 @end smallexample
4410 @noindent
4411 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4412 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4413 more than one section, as described below.
4414
4415 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4416 @smallexample
4417 *(.text .rdata)
4418 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4419 @end smallexample
4420 @noindent
4421 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4422 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4423 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4424 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4425 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4426 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4427
4428 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4429 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4430 immediately following section, for example:
4431 @smallexample
4432 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4433 @end smallexample
4434 @noindent
4435 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4436 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4437 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4438 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4439 could be modified to:
4440 @smallexample
4441 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4442 @end smallexample
4443 @noindent
4444 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4445 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4446 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4447 @smallexample
4448 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4449 @end smallexample
4450
4451 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4452 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4453 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4454 @smallexample
4455 data.o(.data)
4456 @end smallexample
4457
4458 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4459 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4460
4461 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4462
4463 @smallexample
4464 @group
4465 SECTIONS @{
4466 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4467 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4468 @}
4469 @end group
4470 @end smallexample
4471
4472 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4473 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4474 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4475 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4476 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4477
4478 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4479 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4480 with no whitespace around the colon.
4481
4482 @table @samp
4483 @item archive:file
4484 matches file within archive
4485 @item archive:
4486 matches the whole archive
4487 @item :file
4488 matches file but not one in an archive
4489 @end table
4490
4491 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4492 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4493 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4494 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4495 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4496 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4497 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4498 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4499 command.
4500
4501 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4502 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4503 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4504 @smallexample
4505 data.o
4506 @end smallexample
4507
4508 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4509 and does not contain any wild card
4510 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4511 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4512 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4513 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4514 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4515 the archive search path.
4516
4517 @node Input Section Wildcards
4518 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4519 @cindex input section wildcards
4520 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4521 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4522 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4523 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4524 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4525
4526 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4527 pattern for the file name.
4528
4529 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4530
4531 @table @samp
4532 @item *
4533 matches any number of characters
4534 @item ?
4535 matches any single character
4536 @item [@var{chars}]
4537 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4538 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4539 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4540 @item \
4541 quotes the following character
4542 @end table
4543
4544 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4545 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4546 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4547 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4548 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4549 a @samp{/} character.
4550
4551 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4552 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4553 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4554
4555 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4556 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4557 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4558 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4559 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4560 @smallexample
4561 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4562 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4563 @end smallexample
4564
4565 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4566 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4567 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4568 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4569 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4570 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4571 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4572
4573 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4574 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4575 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4576 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4577 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4578 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4579
4580 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4581 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4582 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4583 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4584 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4585
4586 @cindex SORT
4587 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4588
4589 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4590 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4591
4592 @enumerate
4593 @item
4594 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4595 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4596 sections have the same name.
4597 @item
4598 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4599 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4600 sections have the same alignment.
4601 @item
4602 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4603 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4604 @item
4605 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4606 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4607 @item
4608 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4609 @end enumerate
4610
4611 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4612 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4613 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4614
4615 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4616 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4617 treated as nested sorting command.
4618
4619 @enumerate
4620 @item
4621 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4622 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4623 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4624 @item
4625 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4626 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4627 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4628 @end enumerate
4629
4630 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4631 command-line option will be ignored.
4632
4633 @cindex SORT_NONE
4634 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4635 section sorting option.
4636
4637 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4638 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4639 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4640
4641 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4642 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4643 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4644 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4645 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4646 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4647 @smallexample
4648 @group
4649 SECTIONS @{
4650 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4651 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4652 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4653 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4654 @}
4655 @end group
4656 @end smallexample
4657
4658 @node Input Section Common
4659 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4660 @cindex common symbol placement
4661 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4662 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4663 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4664 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4665 named @samp{COMMON}.
4666
4667 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4668 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4669 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4670 input files are placed in another section.
4671
4672 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4673 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4674 @smallexample
4675 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4676 @end smallexample
4677
4678 @cindex scommon section
4679 @cindex small common symbols
4680 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4681 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4682 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4683 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4684 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4685 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4686 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4687 locations.
4688
4689 @cindex [COMMON]
4690 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4691 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4692 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4693
4694 @node Input Section Keep
4695 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4696 @cindex KEEP
4697 @cindex garbage collection
4698 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4699 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4700 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4701 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4702 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4703
4704 @node Input Section Example
4705 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4706 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4707 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4708 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4709 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4710 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4711 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4712 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4713 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4714 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4715
4716 @smallexample
4717 @group
4718 SECTIONS @{
4719 outputa 0x10000 :
4720 @{
4721 all.o
4722 foo.o (.input1)
4723 @}
4724 @end group
4725 @group
4726 outputb :
4727 @{
4728 foo.o (.input2)
4729 foo1.o (.input1)
4730 @}
4731 @end group
4732 @group
4733 outputc :
4734 @{
4735 *(.input1)
4736 *(.input2)
4737 @}
4738 @}
4739 @end group
4740 @end smallexample
4741
4742 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4743 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4744 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4745 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4746 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4747 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4748 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4749
4750 @node Output Section Data
4751 @subsection Output Section Data
4752 @cindex data
4753 @cindex section data
4754 @cindex output section data
4755 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4756 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4757 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4758 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4759 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4760 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4761 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4762 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4763 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4764 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4765 counter.
4766
4767 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4768 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4769 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4770 stored.
4771
4772 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4773 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4774 @smallexample
4775 BYTE(1)
4776 LONG(addr)
4777 @end smallexample
4778
4779 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4780 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4781 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4782 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4783 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4784
4785 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4786 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4787 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4788 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4789 endianness of the first input object file.
4790
4791 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4792 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4793 @smallexample
4794 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4795 @end smallexample
4796 whereas this will work:
4797 @smallexample
4798 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4799 @end smallexample
4800
4801 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4802 @cindex holes, filling
4803 @cindex unspecified memory
4804 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4805 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4806 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4807 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4808 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4809 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4810 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4811 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4812 different parts of an output section.
4813
4814 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4815 value @samp{0x90}:
4816 @smallexample
4817 FILL(0x90909090)
4818 @end smallexample
4819
4820 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4821 section attribute, but it only affects the
4822 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4823 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4824 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4825 expression.
4826
4827 @node Output Section Keywords
4828 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4829 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4830 commands.
4831
4832 @table @code
4833 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4834 @cindex input filename symbols
4835 @cindex filename symbols
4836 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4837 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4838 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4839 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4840 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4841
4842 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4843 normally used for any other object file format.
4844
4845 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4846 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4847 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4848 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4849 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4850 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4851 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4852 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4853 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4854 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4855 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4856 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4857 ignored for other object file formats.
4858
4859 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4860 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4861 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4862 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4863 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4864 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4865 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4866 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4867 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4868 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4869 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4870 @code{exit}.
4871
4872 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4873 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4874 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4875 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4876 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4877 runtime code expects to see.
4878
4879 @smallexample
4880 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4881 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4882 *(.ctors)
4883 LONG(0)
4884 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4885 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4886 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4887 *(.dtors)
4888 LONG(0)
4889 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4890 @end smallexample
4891
4892 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4893 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4894 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4895 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4896 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4897 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4898 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4899 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4900
4901 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4902 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4903 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4904 scripts.
4905
4906 @end table
4907
4908 @node Output Section Discarding
4909 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4910 @cindex discarding sections
4911 @cindex sections, discarding
4912 @cindex removing sections
4913 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4914 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4915 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4916 @smallexample
4917 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4918 @end smallexample
4919 @noindent
4920 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4921 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4922 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4923 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4924 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4925 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4926 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4927 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4928 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4929
4930 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4931 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4932 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4933 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4934 section is discarded.
4935
4936 @cindex /DISCARD/
4937 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4938 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4939 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4940
4941 @node Output Section Attributes
4942 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4943 @cindex output section attributes
4944 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4945 like this:
4946
4947 @smallexample
4948 @group
4949 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4950 [AT(@var{lma})]
4951 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4952 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4953 [@var{constraint}]
4954 @{
4955 @var{output-section-command}
4956 @var{output-section-command}
4957 @dots{}
4958 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4959 @end group
4960 @end smallexample
4961
4962 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4963 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4964 remaining section attributes.
4965
4966 @menu
4967 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4968 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4969 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4970 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4971 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4972 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4973 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4974 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4975 @end menu
4976
4977 @node Output Section Type
4978 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4979 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4980 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4981
4982 @table @code
4983 @item NOLOAD
4984 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4985 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4986 @item DSECT
4987 @itemx COPY
4988 @itemx INFO
4989 @itemx OVERLAY
4990 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4991 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4992 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4993 section when the program is run.
4994 @end table
4995
4996 @kindex NOLOAD
4997 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4998 @cindex loading, preventing
4999 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5000 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5001 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5002 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5003 need to be loaded when the program is run.
5004 @smallexample
5005 @group
5006 SECTIONS @{
5007 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5008 @dots{}
5009 @}
5010 @end group
5011 @end smallexample
5012
5013 @node Output Section LMA
5014 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
5015 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5016 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
5017 @cindex load address
5018 @cindex section load address
5019 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5020 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5021 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5022 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5023 address is optional.
5024
5025 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5026 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5027 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5028 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5029 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5030
5031 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5032 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5033 load address:
5034
5035 @itemize @bullet
5036 @item
5037 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5038 the LMA address as well.
5039
5040 @item
5041 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5042
5043 @item
5044 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5045 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5046 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5047 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5048 the last section in the located region.
5049
5050 @item
5051 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5052 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5053
5054 @item
5055 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5056 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5057 @end itemize
5058
5059 @cindex ROM initialized data
5060 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5061 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5062 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5063 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5064 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5065 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5066 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5067 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5068 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5069
5070 @smallexample
5071 @group
5072 SECTIONS
5073 @{
5074 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5075 .mdata 0x2000 :
5076 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5077 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5078 .bss 0x3000 :
5079 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5080 @}
5081 @end group
5082 @end smallexample
5083
5084 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5085 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5086 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5087 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5088 script.
5089
5090 @smallexample
5091 @group
5092 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5093 char *src = &_etext;
5094 char *dst = &_data;
5095
5096 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5097 while (dst < &_edata)
5098 *dst++ = *src++;
5099
5100 /* Zero bss. */
5101 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5102 *dst = 0;
5103 @end group
5104 @end smallexample
5105
5106 @node Forced Output Alignment
5107 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5108 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5109 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5110 @cindex output section alignment
5111 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5112 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5113 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5114
5115 @node Forced Input Alignment
5116 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5117 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5118 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5119 @cindex input section alignment
5120 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5121 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5122 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5123
5124 @node Output Section Constraint
5125 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5126 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5127 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5128 @cindex constraints on output sections
5129 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5130 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5131 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5132 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5133
5134 @node Output Section Region
5135 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5136 @kindex >@var{region}
5137 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5138 @cindex memory regions and sections
5139 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5140 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5141
5142 Here is a simple example:
5143 @smallexample
5144 @group
5145 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5146 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5147 @end group
5148 @end smallexample
5149
5150 @node Output Section Phdr
5151 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5152 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5153 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5154 @cindex program headers and sections
5155 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5156 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5157 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5158 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5159 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5160 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5161
5162 Here is a simple example:
5163 @smallexample
5164 @group
5165 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5166 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5167 @end group
5168 @end smallexample
5169
5170 @node Output Section Fill
5171 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5172 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5173 @cindex section fill pattern
5174 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5175 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5176 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5177 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5178 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5179 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5180 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5181 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5182 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5183 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5184 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5185 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5186 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5187
5188 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5189 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5190
5191 Here is a simple example:
5192 @smallexample
5193 @group
5194 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5195 @end group
5196 @end smallexample
5197
5198 @node Overlay Description
5199 @subsection Overlay Description
5200 @kindex OVERLAY
5201 @cindex overlays
5202 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5203 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5204 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5205 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5206 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5207 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5208 than another.
5209
5210 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5211 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5212 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5213 command is as follows:
5214 @smallexample
5215 @group
5216 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5217 @{
5218 @var{secname1}
5219 @{
5220 @var{output-section-command}
5221 @var{output-section-command}
5222 @dots{}
5223 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5224 @var{secname2}
5225 @{
5226 @var{output-section-command}
5227 @var{output-section-command}
5228 @dots{}
5229 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5230 @dots{}
5231 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5232 @end group
5233 @end smallexample
5234
5235 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5236 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5237 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5238 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5239 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5240 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5241
5242 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5243 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5244
5245 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5246 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5247 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5248 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5249 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5250 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5251
5252 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5253 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5254 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5255 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5256 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5257
5258 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5259 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5260 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5261 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5262 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5263 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5264 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5265
5266 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5267 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5268
5269 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5270 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5271 @smallexample
5272 @group
5273 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5274 @{
5275 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5276 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5277 @}
5278 @end group
5279 @end smallexample
5280 @noindent
5281 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5282 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5283 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5284 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5285 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5286 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5287
5288 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5289 like the following.
5290
5291 @smallexample
5292 @group
5293 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5294 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5295 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5296 @end group
5297 @end smallexample
5298
5299 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5300 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5301 example could have been written identically as follows.
5302
5303 @smallexample
5304 @group
5305 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5306 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5307 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5308 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5309 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5310 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5311 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5312 @end group
5313 @end smallexample
5314
5315 @node MEMORY
5316 @section MEMORY Command
5317 @kindex MEMORY
5318 @cindex memory regions
5319 @cindex regions of memory
5320 @cindex allocating memory
5321 @cindex discontinuous memory
5322 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5323 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5324
5325 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5326 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5327 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5328 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5329 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5330 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5331 around to fit into the available regions.
5332
5333 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5334 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5335 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5336 @code{MEMORY} is:
5337 @smallexample
5338 @group
5339 MEMORY
5340 @{
5341 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5342 @dots{}
5343 @}
5344 @end group
5345 @end smallexample
5346
5347 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5348 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5349 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5350 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5351 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5352 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5353 command.
5354
5355 @cindex memory region attributes
5356 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5357 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5358 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5359 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5360 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5361 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5362 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5363
5364 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5365 @table @samp
5366 @item R
5367 Read-only section
5368 @item W
5369 Read/write section
5370 @item X
5371 Executable section
5372 @item A
5373 Allocatable section
5374 @item I
5375 Initialized section
5376 @item L
5377 Same as @samp{I}
5378 @item !
5379 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5380 @end table
5381
5382 If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5383 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5384 attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5385 unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5386 not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5387 string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5388 or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5389 the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5390
5391 @kindex ORIGIN =
5392 @kindex o =
5393 @kindex org =
5394 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5395 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5396 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5397 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5398 @code{ORG}).
5399
5400 @kindex LENGTH =
5401 @kindex len =
5402 @kindex l =
5403 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5404 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5405 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5406 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5407
5408 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5409 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5410 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5411 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5412 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5413 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5414 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5415 region.
5416
5417 @smallexample
5418 @group
5419 MEMORY
5420 @{
5421 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5422 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5423 @}
5424 @end group
5425 @end smallexample
5426
5427 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5428 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5429 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5430 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5431 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5432 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5433 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5434 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5435 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5436
5437 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5438 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5439 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5440
5441 @smallexample
5442 @group
5443 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5444 @end group
5445 @end smallexample
5446
5447 @node PHDRS
5448 @section PHDRS Command
5449 @kindex PHDRS
5450 @cindex program headers
5451 @cindex ELF program headers
5452 @cindex program segments
5453 @cindex segments, ELF
5454 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5455 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5456 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5457 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5458
5459 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5460 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5461 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5462 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5463 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5464
5465 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5466 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5467 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5468 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5469 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5470
5471 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5472 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5473 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5474
5475 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5476 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5477
5478 @smallexample
5479 @group
5480 PHDRS
5481 @{
5482 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5483 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5484 @}
5485 @end group
5486 @end smallexample
5487
5488 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5489 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5490 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5491 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5492 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5493 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5494
5495 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5496 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5497 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5498 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5499 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5500 Section Phdr}.
5501
5502 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5503 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5504 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5505 contain the section.
5506
5507 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5508 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5509 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5510 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5511 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5512 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5513 segment at all.
5514
5515 @kindex FILEHDR
5516 @kindex PHDRS
5517 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5518 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5519 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5520 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5521 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5522 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5523 these keywords.
5524
5525 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5526 value of the keyword.
5527
5528 @table @asis
5529 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5530 Indicates an unused program header.
5531
5532 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5533 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5534 the file.
5535
5536 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5537 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5538
5539 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5540 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5541 found.
5542
5543 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5544 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5545
5546 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5547 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5548 ABI.
5549
5550 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5551 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5552
5553 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5554 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5555
5556 @item @var{expression}
5557 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5558 be used for types not defined above.
5559 @end table
5560
5561 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5562 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5563 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5564 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5565 output section attribute.
5566
5567 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5568 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5569 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5570 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5571 header.
5572
5573 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5574 headers used on a native ELF system.
5575
5576 @example
5577 @group
5578 PHDRS
5579 @{
5580 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5581 interp PT_INTERP ;
5582 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5583 data PT_LOAD ;
5584 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5585 @}
5586
5587 SECTIONS
5588 @{
5589 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5590 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5591 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5592 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5593 @dots{}
5594 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5595 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5596 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5597 @dots{}
5598 @}
5599 @end group
5600 @end example
5601
5602 @node VERSION
5603 @section VERSION Command
5604 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5605 @cindex symbol versions
5606 @cindex version script
5607 @cindex versions of symbols
5608 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5609 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5610 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5611 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5612 shared library.
5613
5614 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5615 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5616 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5617
5618 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5619 @smallexample
5620 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5621 @end smallexample
5622
5623 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5624 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5625 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5626 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5627 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5628 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5629 library.
5630
5631 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5632 examples.
5633
5634 @smallexample
5635 VERS_1.1 @{
5636 global:
5637 foo1;
5638 local:
5639 old*;
5640 original*;
5641 new*;
5642 @};
5643
5644 VERS_1.2 @{
5645 foo2;
5646 @} VERS_1.1;
5647
5648 VERS_2.0 @{
5649 bar1; bar2;
5650 extern "C++" @{
5651 ns::*;
5652 "f(int, double)";
5653 @};
5654 @} VERS_1.2;
5655 @end smallexample
5656
5657 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5658 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5659 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5660 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5661 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5662 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5663 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5664 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5665 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5666 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5667
5668 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5669 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5670 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5671
5672 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5673 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5674 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5675
5676 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5677 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5678 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5679 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5680 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5681 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5682 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5683 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5684 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5685
5686 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5687 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5688 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5689 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5690
5691 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5692 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5693 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5694 won't.
5695
5696 @smallexample
5697 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5698 @end smallexample
5699
5700 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5701 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5702 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5703 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5704 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5705 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5706 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5707 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5708 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5709 search for each symbol reference.
5710
5711 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5712 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5713 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5714 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5715 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5716 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5717 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5718 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5719 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5720
5721 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5722 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5723 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5724 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5725 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5726 @smallexample
5727 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5728 @end smallexample
5729 @noindent
5730 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5731 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5732 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5733 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5734 takes precedence over a version script.
5735
5736 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5737 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5738 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5739 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5740 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5741
5742 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5743 source file. Here is an example:
5744
5745 @smallexample
5746 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5747 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5748 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5749 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5750 @end smallexample
5751
5752 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5753 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5754 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5755 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5756
5757 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5758 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5759 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5760 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5761 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5762 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5763
5764 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5765 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5766 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5767 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5768
5769 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5770
5771 @smallexample
5772 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5773 @end smallexample
5774
5775 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5776 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5777 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5778 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5779 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5780
5781 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5782 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5783 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5784 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5785 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5786 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5787 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5788 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5789 expect when you upgrade.
5790
5791 @node Expressions
5792 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5793 @cindex expressions
5794 @cindex arithmetic
5795 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5796 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5797 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5798 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5799
5800 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5801
5802 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5803 expressions.
5804
5805 @menu
5806 * Constants:: Constants
5807 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5808 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5809 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5810 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5811 * Operators:: Operators
5812 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5813 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5814 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5815 @end menu
5816
5817 @node Constants
5818 @subsection Constants
5819 @cindex integer notation
5820 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5821 All constants are integers.
5822
5823 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5824 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5825 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5826 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5827 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5828 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5829
5830 @cindex scaled integers
5831 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5832 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5833 @cindex suffixes for integers
5834 @cindex integer suffixes
5835 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5836 constant by
5837 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5838 @ifnottex
5839 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5840 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5841 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5842 @end ifnottex
5843 @tex
5844 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5845 @end tex
5846 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5847 respectively. For example, the following
5848 all refer to the same quantity:
5849
5850 @smallexample
5851 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5852 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5853 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5854 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5855 @end smallexample
5856
5857 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5858 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5859
5860 @node Symbolic Constants
5861 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5862 @cindex symbolic constants
5863 @kindex CONSTANT
5864 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5865 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5866
5867 @table @code
5868 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5869 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5870 The target's maximum page size.
5871
5872 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5873 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5874 The target's default page size.
5875 @end table
5876
5877 So for example:
5878
5879 @smallexample
5880 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5881 @end smallexample
5882
5883 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5884 supported by the target.
5885
5886 @node Symbols
5887 @subsection Symbol Names
5888 @cindex symbol names
5889 @cindex names
5890 @cindex quoted symbol names
5891 @kindex "
5892 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5893 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5894 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5895 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5896 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5897 @smallexample
5898 "SECTION" = 9;
5899 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5900 @end smallexample
5901
5902 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5903 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5904 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5905
5906 @node Orphan Sections
5907 @subsection Orphan Sections
5908 @cindex orphan
5909 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5910 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5911 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5912 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5913 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5914
5915 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5916 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5917 placed at the end of that output section.
5918
5919 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5920 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5921 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5922 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5923 one new output section.
5924
5925 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5926 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5927 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5928 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5929 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5930 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5931 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5932
5933 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5934 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
5935 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5936
5937 @node Location Counter
5938 @subsection The Location Counter
5939 @kindex .
5940 @cindex dot
5941 @cindex location counter
5942 @cindex current output location
5943 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5944 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5945 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5946 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5947 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5948
5949 @cindex holes
5950 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5951 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5952 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5953 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5954 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5955
5956 @smallexample
5957 SECTIONS
5958 @{
5959 output :
5960 @{
5961 file1(.text)
5962 . = . + 1000;
5963 file2(.text)
5964 . += 1000;
5965 file3(.text)
5966 @} = 0x12345678;
5967 @}
5968 @end smallexample
5969 @noindent
5970 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5971 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5972 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5973 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5974 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5975 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5976
5977 @cindex dot inside sections
5978 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5979 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5980 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5981 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5982 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5983 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5984
5985 @smallexample
5986 SECTIONS
5987 @{
5988 . = 0x100
5989 .text: @{
5990 *(.text)
5991 . = 0x200
5992 @}
5993 . = 0x500
5994 .data: @{
5995 *(.data)
5996 . += 0x600
5997 @}
5998 @}
5999 @end smallexample
6000
6001 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6002 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6003 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6004 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6005 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6006 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6007 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6008 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6009
6010 @cindex dot outside sections
6011 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6012 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6013 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6014
6015 @smallexample
6016 SECTIONS
6017 @{
6018 start_of_text = . ;
6019 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6020 end_of_text = . ;
6021
6022 start_of_data = . ;
6023 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6024 end_of_data = . ;
6025 @}
6026 @end smallexample
6027
6028 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6029 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6030 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6031 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6032 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6033 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6034 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6035 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6036 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6037 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6038 as follows:
6039
6040 @smallexample
6041 SECTIONS
6042 @{
6043 start_of_text = . ;
6044 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6045 end_of_text = . ;
6046
6047 start_of_data = . ;
6048 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6049 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6050 end_of_data = . ;
6051 @}
6052 @end smallexample
6053
6054 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6055 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6056 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6057 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6058 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6059 section. So you could write:
6060
6061 @smallexample
6062 SECTIONS
6063 @{
6064 start_of_text = . ;
6065 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6066 end_of_text = . ;
6067
6068 . = . ;
6069 start_of_data = . ;
6070 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6071 end_of_data = . ;
6072 @}
6073 @end smallexample
6074
6075 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6076 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6077
6078 @need 2000
6079 @node Operators
6080 @subsection Operators
6081 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6082 @cindex arithmetic operators
6083 @cindex precedence in expressions
6084 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6085 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6086 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6087 @ifnottex
6088 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6089 @smallexample
6090 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6091 (highest)
6092 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6093 2 left * / %
6094 3 left + -
6095 4 left >> <<
6096 5 left == != > < <= >=
6097 6 left &
6098 7 left |
6099 8 left &&
6100 9 left ||
6101 10 right ? :
6102 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6103 (lowest)
6104 @end smallexample
6105 Notes:
6106 (1) Prefix operators
6107 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6108 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6109 @end ifnottex
6110 @tex
6111 \vskip \baselineskip
6112 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6113 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6114 \hrule
6115 \halign
6116 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6117 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6118 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6119 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6120 \noalign{\hrule}
6121 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6122 &highest&&&&&\cr
6123 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6124 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6125 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6126 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6127 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6128 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6129 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6130 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6131 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6132 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6133 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6134 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6135 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6136 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6137 \hrule}
6138 @end tex
6139 @iftex
6140 {
6141 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6142 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6143 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6144 }
6145 @end iftex
6146 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6147
6148 @node Evaluation
6149 @subsection Evaluation
6150 @cindex lazy evaluation
6151 @cindex expression evaluation order
6152 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6153 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6154
6155 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6156 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6157 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6158 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6159
6160 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6161 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6162 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6163 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6164
6165 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6166 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6167 allocation.
6168
6169 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6170 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6171
6172 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6173 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6174 following
6175 @smallexample
6176 @group
6177 SECTIONS
6178 @{
6179 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6180 @{ *(.text) @}
6181 @}
6182 @end group
6183 @end smallexample
6184 @noindent
6185 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6186 address}.
6187
6188 @node Expression Section
6189 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6190 @cindex expression sections
6191 @cindex absolute expressions
6192 @cindex relative expressions
6193 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6194 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6195 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6196 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6197 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6198 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6199 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6200 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6201 operations.
6202
6203 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6204 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6205 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6206 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6207 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6208 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6209 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6210 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6211 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6212 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6213 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6214 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6215 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6216 everywhere.
6217
6218 In the following simple example,
6219
6220 @smallexample
6221 @group
6222 SECTIONS
6223 @{
6224 . = 0x100;
6225 __executable_start = 0x100;
6226 .data :
6227 @{
6228 . = 0x10;
6229 __data_start = 0x10;
6230 *(.data)
6231 @}
6232 @dots{}
6233 @}
6234 @end group
6235 @end smallexample
6236
6237 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6238 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6239 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6240 section in the second two assignments.
6241
6242 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6243 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6244
6245 @itemize @bullet
6246 @item
6247 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6248 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6249 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6250 @item
6251 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6252 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6253 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6254 @item
6255 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6256 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6257 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6258 before applying the operator.
6259 @end itemize
6260
6261 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6262
6263 @itemize @bullet
6264 @item
6265 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6266 @item
6267 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6268 @item
6269 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6270 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6271 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6272 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6273 but an absolute address otherwise.
6274 @item
6275 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6276 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6277 section as the relative operand(s).
6278 @item
6279 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6280 conversions) is an absolute address.
6281 @end itemize
6282
6283 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6284 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6285 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6286 section @samp{.data}:
6287 @smallexample
6288 SECTIONS
6289 @{
6290 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6291 @}
6292 @end smallexample
6293 @noindent
6294 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6295 @samp{.data} section.
6296
6297 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6298 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6299
6300 @node Builtin Functions
6301 @subsection Builtin Functions
6302 @cindex functions in expressions
6303 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6304 use in linker script expressions.
6305
6306 @table @code
6307 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6308 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6309 @cindex expression, absolute
6310 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6311 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6312 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6313 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6314
6315 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6316 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6317 @cindex section address in expression
6318 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6319 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6320 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6321 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6322 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6323 the other two will be absolute:
6324 @smallexample
6325 @group
6326 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6327 .output1 :
6328 @{
6329 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6330 @dots{}
6331 @}
6332 .output :
6333 @{
6334 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6335 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6336 @}
6337 @dots{} @}
6338 @end group
6339 @end smallexample
6340
6341 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6342 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6343 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6344 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6345 @cindex round up location counter
6346 @cindex align location counter
6347 @cindex round up expression
6348 @cindex align expression
6349 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6350 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6351 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6352 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6353 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6354 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6355
6356 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6357 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6358 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6359 input sections:
6360 @smallexample
6361 @group
6362 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6363 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6364 *(.data)
6365 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6366 @}
6367 @dots{} @}
6368 @end group
6369 @end smallexample
6370 @noindent
6371 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6372 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6373 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6374 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6375
6376 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6377
6378 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6379 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6380 @cindex section alignment
6381 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6382 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6383 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6384 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6385 value in that section.
6386 @smallexample
6387 @group
6388 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6389 .output @{
6390 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6391 @dots{}
6392 @}
6393 @dots{} @}
6394 @end group
6395 @end smallexample
6396
6397 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6398 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6399 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6400 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6401 section.
6402
6403 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6404 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6405 This is equivalent to either
6406 @smallexample
6407 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6408 @end smallexample
6409 or
6410 @smallexample
6411 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6412 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6413 @end smallexample
6414 @noindent
6415 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6416 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6417 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6418 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6419 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6420 bytes in the on-disk file.
6421
6422 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6423 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6424 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6425 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6426 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6427 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6428 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6429
6430 @noindent
6431 Example:
6432 @smallexample
6433 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6434 @end smallexample
6435
6436 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6437 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6438 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6439 evaluation purposes.
6440
6441 @smallexample
6442 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6443 @end smallexample
6444
6445 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6446 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6447 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6448 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6449 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6450 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6451 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6452 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6453 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6454 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6455 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6456 section alignment.
6457
6458 @smallexample
6459 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6460 @end smallexample
6461
6462 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6463 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6464 @cindex symbol defaults
6465 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6466 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6467 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6468 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6469 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6470 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6471 existed, its value is preserved:
6472
6473 @smallexample
6474 @group
6475 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6476 .text : @{
6477 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6478 @dots{}
6479 @}
6480 @dots{}
6481 @}
6482 @end group
6483 @end smallexample
6484
6485 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6486 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6487 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6488
6489 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6490 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6491 @cindex section load address in expression
6492 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6493 Section LMA}).
6494
6495 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6496 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6497 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6498 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6499
6500 @kindex MAX
6501 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6502 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6503
6504 @kindex MIN
6505 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6506 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6507
6508 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6509 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6510 @cindex unallocated address, next
6511 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6512 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6513 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6514 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6515
6516 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6517 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6518 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6519
6520 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6521 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6522 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6523 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6524 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6525 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6526 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6527 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6528 name.
6529
6530 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6531 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6532 @cindex section size
6533 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6534 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6535 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6536 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6537 @smallexample
6538 @group
6539 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6540 .output @{
6541 .start = . ;
6542 @dots{}
6543 .end = . ;
6544 @}
6545 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6546 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6547 @dots{} @}
6548 @end group
6549 @end smallexample
6550
6551 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6552 @itemx sizeof_headers
6553 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6554 @cindex header size
6555 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6556 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6557 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6558 choose, to facilitate paging.
6559
6560 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6561 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6562 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6563 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6564 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6565 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6566 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6567 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6568 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6569 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6570 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6571 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6572 @end table
6573
6574 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6575 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6576 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6577 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6578 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6579 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6580 linker will report an error.
6581
6582 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6583
6584 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6585 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6586 commands.
6587
6588 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6589 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6590 read. This can affect archive searching.
6591
6592 @ifset GENERIC
6593 @node Machine Dependent
6594 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6595
6596 @cindex machine dependencies
6597 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6598 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6599 functionality are not listed.
6600
6601 @menu
6602 @ifset H8300
6603 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6604 @end ifset
6605 @ifset M68HC11
6606 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6607 @end ifset
6608 @ifset ARM
6609 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6610 @end ifset
6611 @ifset HPPA
6612 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6613 @end ifset
6614 @ifset M68K
6615 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6616 @end ifset
6617 @ifset MIPS
6618 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6619 @end ifset
6620 @ifset MMIX
6621 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6622 @end ifset
6623 @ifset MSP430
6624 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6625 @end ifset
6626 @ifset NDS32
6627 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6628 @end ifset
6629 @ifset NIOSII
6630 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6631 @end ifset
6632 @ifset POWERPC
6633 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6634 @end ifset
6635 @ifset POWERPC64
6636 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6637 @end ifset
6638 @ifset S/390
6639 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6640 @end ifset
6641 @ifset SPU
6642 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6643 @end ifset
6644 @ifset TICOFF
6645 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6646 @end ifset
6647 @ifset WIN32
6648 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6649 @end ifset
6650 @ifset XTENSA
6651 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6652 @end ifset
6653 @end menu
6654 @end ifset
6655
6656 @ifset H8300
6657 @ifclear GENERIC
6658 @raisesections
6659 @end ifclear
6660
6661 @node H8/300
6662 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6663
6664 @cindex H8/300 support
6665 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6666 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6667
6668 @table @emph
6669 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6670 @item relaxing address modes
6671 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6672 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6673 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6674 respectively.
6675
6676 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6677 @item synthesizing instructions
6678 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6679 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6680 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6681 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6682 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6683 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6684 top page of memory).
6685
6686 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6687 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6688 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6689 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6690 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6691 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6692 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6693
6694 @item bit manipulation instructions
6695 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6696 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6697 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6698 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6699 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6700 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6701 the top page of memory).
6702
6703 @item system control instructions
6704 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6705 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6706 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6707 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6708 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6709 the top page of memory).
6710 @end table
6711
6712 @ifclear GENERIC
6713 @lowersections
6714 @end ifclear
6715 @end ifset
6716
6717 @ifclear GENERIC
6718 @ifset Renesas
6719 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6720 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6721 @node Renesas
6722 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6723
6724 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6725 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6726 options are required for these chips.
6727 @end ifset
6728 @end ifclear
6729
6730 @ifset ARM
6731 @ifclear GENERIC
6732 @raisesections
6733 @end ifclear
6734
6735 @ifset M68HC11
6736 @ifclear GENERIC
6737 @raisesections
6738 @end ifclear
6739
6740 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6741 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6742
6743 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6744
6745 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6746
6747 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6748 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6749
6750 @table @emph
6751 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6752 @item relaxing address modes
6753 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6754 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6755 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6756 respectively.
6757
6758 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6759 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6760 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6761
6762 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6763 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6764 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6765 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6766 @code{bset} instructions.
6767
6768 @end table
6769
6770 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6771
6772 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6773 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6774 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6775 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6776 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6777 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6778 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6779 point to the function trampoline.
6780
6781 @ifclear GENERIC
6782 @lowersections
6783 @end ifclear
6784 @end ifset
6785
6786 @node ARM
6787 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6788
6789 @cindex ARM interworking support
6790 @kindex --support-old-code
6791 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6792 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6793 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6794 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6795 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6796 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6797 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6798 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6799 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6800 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6801
6802 @cindex thumb entry point
6803 @cindex entry point, thumb
6804 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6805 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6806 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6807 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6808 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6809 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6810
6811 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6812 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6813 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6814 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6815 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6816 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6817
6818 @cindex BE8
6819 @kindex --be8
6820 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6821 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6822 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6823 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6824 little-endian code.
6825
6826 @cindex TARGET1
6827 @kindex --target1-rel
6828 @kindex --target1-abs
6829 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6830 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6831 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6832 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6833
6834 @cindex TARGET2
6835 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6836 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6837 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6838 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6839 @table @samp
6840 @item rel
6841 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6842 @item abs
6843 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6844 @item got-rel
6845 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6846 @end table
6847
6848 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6849 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6850 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6851 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6852 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6853 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6854
6855 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6856 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6857 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6858
6859 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6860 relocations are ignored.
6861
6862 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6863 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6864 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6865 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6866
6867 @smallexample
6868 TST rM, #1
6869 MOVEQ PC, rM
6870 BX Rn
6871 @end smallexample
6872
6873 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6874 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6875 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6876
6877 @cindex USE_BLX
6878 @kindex --use-blx
6879 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6880 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6881 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6882 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6883 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6884
6885 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6886 specify it if you are using that target.
6887
6888 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6889 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6890 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6891 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6892 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6893 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6894 the support code can read the intended values.
6895
6896 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6897 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6898 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6899 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6900 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6901 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6902
6903 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6904 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6905 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6906 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6907 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6908 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6909
6910 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6911 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6912 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6913 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6914 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6915 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6916 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6917
6918 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6919 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6920 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6921 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6922 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6923 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6924 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6925
6926 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6927 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6928 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6929
6930 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6931 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6932
6933 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6934 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6935 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6936 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6937 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6938 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6939 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6940 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6941
6942 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6943 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6944
6945 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6946 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6947 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6948 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6949 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6950
6951 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6952 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6953 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6954 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6955 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6956 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6957
6958 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6959 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6960
6961 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6962 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6963 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6964 occurs.
6965
6966 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6967 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6968 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6969 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6970 occurs.
6971
6972 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6973 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6974 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6975 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6976 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6977 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6978 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6979 not be diagnosed.
6980
6981 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6982 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6983 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6984 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6985 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6986 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6987 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6988
6989 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6990 @kindex --pic-veneer
6991 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6992 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6993 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6994 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6995
6996 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6997 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6998 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6999 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7000 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7001 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7002 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7003 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7004 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7005 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7006 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7007 where they should be placed.
7008
7009 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7010 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7011 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7012 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7013 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7014 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7015 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7016 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7017 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7018 from the input sections.
7019
7020 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7021 @samp{N = +1}.
7022
7023 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7024 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7025 otherwise.
7026
7027 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7028 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7029 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7030 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7031
7032 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7033
7034 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7035 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7036 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7037 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7038
7039 Please contact ARM for further details.
7040
7041 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7042 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7043 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7044 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7045
7046 @kindex --long-plt
7047 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7048 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7049 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7050 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7051
7052 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7053 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7054 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7055 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7056
7057 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7058 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7059 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7060 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7061 veneers in memory.
7062
7063 @kindex --cmse-implib
7064 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7065 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7066 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7067 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7068 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7069
7070 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7071 @cindex Input import library
7072 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7073 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7074 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7075 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7076 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7077 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7078 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7079 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7080 specified.
7081
7082 @ifclear GENERIC
7083 @lowersections
7084 @end ifclear
7085 @end ifset
7086
7087 @ifset HPPA
7088 @ifclear GENERIC
7089 @raisesections
7090 @end ifclear
7091
7092 @node HPPA ELF32
7093 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7094 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7095 @kindex --multi-subspace
7096 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7097 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7098 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7099 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7100 multiple sub-spaces.
7101
7102 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7103 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7104 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7105 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7106 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7107 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7108 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7109 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7110 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7111 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7112 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7113 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7114 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7115 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7116 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7117 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7118
7119 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7120 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7121 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7122 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7123
7124 @ifclear GENERIC
7125 @lowersections
7126 @end ifclear
7127 @end ifset
7128
7129 @ifset M68K
7130 @ifclear GENERIC
7131 @raisesections
7132 @end ifclear
7133
7134 @node M68K
7135 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7136
7137 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7138 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7139 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7140 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7141 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7142 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7143 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7144 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7145 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7146 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7147 support such GOTs.
7148 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7149 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7150 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7151 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7152
7153 @ifclear GENERIC
7154 @lowersections
7155 @end ifclear
7156 @end ifset
7157
7158 @ifset MIPS
7159 @ifclear GENERIC
7160 @raisesections
7161 @end ifclear
7162
7163 @node MIPS
7164 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7165
7166 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7167 @kindex --insn32
7168 @kindex --no-insn32
7169 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7170 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7171 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7172 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7173 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7174 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7175
7176 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7177 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7178 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7179 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7180 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7181 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7182 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7183 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7184 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7185 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7186 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7187 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7188
7189 @ifclear GENERIC
7190 @lowersections
7191 @end ifclear
7192 @end ifset
7193
7194 @ifset MMIX
7195 @ifclear GENERIC
7196 @raisesections
7197 @end ifclear
7198
7199 @node MMIX
7200 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7201 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7202 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7203 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7204 can translate between the two formats.
7205
7206 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7207 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7208 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7209 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7210 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7211 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7212 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7213 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7214
7215 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7216 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7217 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7218 of a section.
7219
7220 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7221 are left out from an mmo file.
7222
7223 @ifclear GENERIC
7224 @lowersections
7225 @end ifclear
7226 @end ifset
7227
7228 @ifset MSP430
7229 @ifclear GENERIC
7230 @raisesections
7231 @end ifclear
7232
7233 @node MSP430
7234 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7235 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7236 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7237 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7238
7239 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7240 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7241
7242 @table @code
7243 @item @samp{.vectors}
7244 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7245
7246 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7247 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7248 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7249
7250 @item @samp{.infomem}
7251 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7252 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7253
7254 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7255 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7256 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7257
7258 @item @samp{.noinit}
7259 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7260
7261 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7262 @end table
7263
7264 @table @option
7265 @cindex MSP430 Options
7266 @kindex --code-region
7267 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7268 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7269 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7270 using this option.
7271
7272 @kindex --data-region
7273 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7274 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7275 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7276 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7277
7278 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7279 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7280 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7281 and @code{--data-region} options.
7282 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7283 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7284 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7285 @end table
7286
7287 @ifclear GENERIC
7288 @lowersections
7289 @end ifclear
7290 @end ifset
7291
7292 @ifset NDS32
7293 @ifclear GENERIC
7294 @raisesections
7295 @end ifclear
7296
7297 @node NDS32
7298 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7299 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7300 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7301 relaxes objects according to these options.
7302
7303 @table @code
7304 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7305 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7306
7307 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7308 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7309
7310 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7311 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7312
7313 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7314 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7315
7316 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7317 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7318
7319 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7320 Update the existing EX9 table.
7321
7322 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7323 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7324
7325 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7326 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7327
7328 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7329 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7330
7331 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7332 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7333 @end table
7334
7335 @ifclear GENERIC
7336 @lowersections
7337 @end ifclear
7338 @end ifset
7339
7340 @ifset NIOSII
7341 @ifclear GENERIC
7342 @raisesections
7343 @end ifclear
7344
7345 @node Nios II
7346 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7347 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7348 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7349
7350 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7351 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7352 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7353 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7354 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7355 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7356 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7357 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7358 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7359 larger than 256MB.
7360
7361 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7362 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7363 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7364 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7365 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7366 register as a temporary.
7367
7368 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7369 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7370 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7371
7372 @ifclear GENERIC
7373 @lowersections
7374 @end ifclear
7375 @end ifset
7376
7377 @ifset POWERPC
7378 @ifclear GENERIC
7379 @raisesections
7380 @end ifclear
7381
7382 @node PowerPC ELF32
7383 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7384 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7385 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7386 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7387 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7388 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7389 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7390 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7391 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7392 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7393 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7394 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7395 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7396
7397 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7398 @table @option
7399 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7400 @kindex --bss-plt
7401 @item --bss-plt
7402 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7403 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7404 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7405 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7406 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7407 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7408 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7409 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7410
7411 @kindex --secure-plt
7412 @item --secure-plt
7413 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7414 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7415 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7416 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7417 style BSS PLT.
7418
7419 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7420 @kindex --sdata-got
7421 @item --sdata-got
7422 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7423 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7424 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7425 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7426 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7427 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7428 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7429 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7430 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7431 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7432 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7433 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7434
7435 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7436 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7437 @item --emit-stub-syms
7438 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7439 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7440
7441 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7442 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7443 @item --no-tls-optimize
7444 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7445 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7446 disable the optimization.
7447 @end table
7448
7449 @ifclear GENERIC
7450 @lowersections
7451 @end ifclear
7452 @end ifset
7453
7454 @ifset POWERPC64
7455 @ifclear GENERIC
7456 @raisesections
7457 @end ifclear
7458
7459 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7460 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7461
7462 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7463 @table @option
7464 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7465 @kindex --stub-group-size
7466 @item --stub-group-size
7467 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7468 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7469 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7470 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7471 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7472 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7473 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7474 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7475 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7476 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7477 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7478 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7479 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7480 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7481
7482 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7483 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7484 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7485 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7486
7487 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7488 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7489 @item --emit-stub-syms
7490 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7491 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7492
7493 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7494 @kindex --dotsyms
7495 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7496 @item --dotsyms
7497 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7498 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7499 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7500 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7501 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7502 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7503 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7504 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7505 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7506 feature.
7507
7508 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7509 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7510 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7511 @item --save-restore-funcs
7512 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7513 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7514 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7515 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7516 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7517 link.
7518
7519 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7520 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7521 @item --no-tls-optimize
7522 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7523 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7524 disable the optimization.
7525
7526 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7527 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7528 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7529 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7530 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7531 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7532 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7533 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7534 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7535 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7536 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7537 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7538 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7539 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7540 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7541
7542 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7543 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7544 @item --no-opd-optimize
7545 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7546 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7547 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7548 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7549
7550 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7551 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7552 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7553 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7554 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7555 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7556 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7557
7558 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7559 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7560 @item --no-toc-optimize
7561 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7562 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7563 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7564 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7565 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7566 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7567 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7568 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7569 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7570 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7571 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7572 optimization.
7573
7574 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7575 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7576 @item --no-multi-toc
7577 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7578 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7579 where TOC
7580 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7581 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7582 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7583 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7584 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7585 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7586 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7587 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7588
7589 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7590 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7591 @item --no-toc-sort
7592 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7593 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7594 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7595 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7596 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7597 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7598 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7599 off this feature.
7600
7601 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7602 @kindex --plt-align
7603 @kindex --no-plt-align
7604 @item --plt-align
7605 @itemx --no-plt-align
7606 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7607 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7608 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7609 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7610 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7611 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7612 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7613
7614 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7615 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7616 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7617 @item --plt-static-chain
7618 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7619 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7620 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7621 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7622
7623 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7624 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7625 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7626 @item --plt-thread-safe
7627 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7628 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7629 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7630 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7631 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7632 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7633 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7634 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7635 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7636 default behaviour.
7637
7638 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7639 @kindex --plt-localentry
7640 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7641 @item --plt-localentry
7642 @itemx --no-localentry
7643 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7644 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7645 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7646 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7647 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7648 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7649 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7650 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7651 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7652 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7653 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7654 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7655 @end table
7656
7657 @ifclear GENERIC
7658 @lowersections
7659 @end ifclear
7660 @end ifset
7661
7662 @ifset S/390
7663 @ifclear GENERIC
7664 @raisesections
7665 @end ifclear
7666
7667 @node S/390 ELF
7668 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7669
7670 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7671 @table @option
7672
7673 @cindex S/390
7674 @kindex --s390-pgste
7675 @item --s390-pgste
7676 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7677 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7678 binaries marked that way.
7679 @end table
7680
7681 @ifclear GENERIC
7682 @lowersections
7683 @end ifclear
7684 @end ifset
7685
7686 @ifset SPU
7687 @ifclear GENERIC
7688 @raisesections
7689 @end ifclear
7690
7691 @node SPU ELF
7692 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7693
7694 @cindex SPU ELF options
7695 @table @option
7696
7697 @cindex SPU plugins
7698 @kindex --plugin
7699 @item --plugin
7700 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7701
7702 @cindex SPU overlays
7703 @kindex --no-overlays
7704 @item --no-overlays
7705 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7706 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7707 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7708 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7709
7710 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7711 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7712 @item --emit-stub-syms
7713 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7714 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7715
7716 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7717 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7718 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7719 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7720 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7721 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7722
7723 @cindex SPU local store size
7724 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7725 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7726 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7727 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7728 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7729
7730 @cindex SPU
7731 @kindex --stack-analysis
7732 @item --stack-analysis
7733 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7734 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7735 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7736 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7737 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7738 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7739 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7740 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7741 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7742 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7743 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7744 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7745 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7746 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7747 and calls will be given.
7748
7749 @cindex SPU
7750 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7751 @item --emit-stack-syms
7752 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7753 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7754 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7755 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7756 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7757 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7758 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7759 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7760 @end table
7761
7762 @ifclear GENERIC
7763 @lowersections
7764 @end ifclear
7765 @end ifset
7766
7767 @ifset TICOFF
7768 @ifclear GENERIC
7769 @raisesections
7770 @end ifclear
7771
7772 @node TI COFF
7773 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7774 @cindex TI COFF versions
7775 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7776 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7777 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7778 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7779 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7780 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7781
7782 @ifclear GENERIC
7783 @lowersections
7784 @end ifclear
7785 @end ifset
7786
7787 @ifset WIN32
7788 @ifclear GENERIC
7789 @raisesections
7790 @end ifclear
7791
7792 @node WIN32
7793 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7794
7795 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7796 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7797 command-line options mentioned here.
7798
7799 @table @emph
7800 @cindex import libraries
7801 @item import libraries
7802 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7803 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7804 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7805 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7806 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7807 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
7808
7809 @item exporting DLL symbols
7810 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7811 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7812
7813 @table @emph
7814 @item using auto-export functionality
7815 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7816 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7817 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
7818
7819 @itemize
7820 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7821 @item --exclude-symbols
7822 @item --exclude-libs
7823 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7824 @item --version-script
7825 @end itemize
7826
7827 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7828 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7829 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7830 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7831 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7832 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7833 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7834 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7835
7836 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7837 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7838 if either of the following are true:
7839
7840 @itemize
7841 @item A DEF file is used.
7842 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7843 @end itemize
7844
7845 @item using a DEF file
7846 @cindex using a DEF file
7847 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7848 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7849 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7850 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7851 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7852
7853 @example
7854 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7855 @end example
7856
7857 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7858 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7859
7860 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7861
7862 @example
7863 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7864
7865 EXPORTS
7866 foo
7867 bar
7868 _bar = bar
7869 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7870 var1 DATA
7871 doo = foo == foo2
7872 eoo DATA == var1
7873 @end example
7874
7875 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7876 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7877 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7878 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7879 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7880 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7881 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7882 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7883 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7884
7885 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7886 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7887 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7888
7889 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7890 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7891 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7892 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7893
7894 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7895 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7896 non-default base address for the image.
7897
7898 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7899 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7900 filename specified on the command line.
7901
7902 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7903
7904 @example
7905 EXPORTS
7906 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7907 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7908 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7909 @end example
7910
7911 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7912 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7913 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7914 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7915 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7916 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7917 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7918
7919 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7920
7921 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7922 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7923 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7924 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7925 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7926
7927 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7928 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7929 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7930 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7931
7932 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7933 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7934 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7935 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7936 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7937 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7938 application will behave unexpectedly.
7939
7940 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7941 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7942 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7943 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7944 the DLL without an import library.
7945
7946 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7947 other DEF file statements
7948
7949 @cindex creating a DEF file
7950 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7951 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
7952
7953 @item Using decorations
7954 @cindex Using decorations
7955 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7956 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7957 declared as:
7958
7959 @example
7960 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7961 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7962 @end example
7963
7964 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7965 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7966 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7967 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7968
7969 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7970 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7971 instead:
7972
7973 @example
7974 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7975 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7976 @end example
7977
7978 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7979 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7980 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7981 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7982 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7983 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7984 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7985 information.
7986 @end table
7987
7988 @cindex automatic data imports
7989 @item automatic data imports
7990 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7991 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7992 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7993 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7994 code to these platforms, especially for large
7995 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7996 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7997 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7998 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7999 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8000 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8001 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8002 trigger the feature's use.
8003
8004 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8005 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8006
8007 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8008 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8009
8010 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8011 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8012 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8013 below.
8014
8015 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8016 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8017 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8018 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8019 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8020 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8021 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8022 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8023 references.
8024
8025 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8026 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8027 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8028 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8029 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8030 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8031 run without error on an older system.
8032
8033 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8034 enabled as needed.
8035
8036 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8037 @item direct linking to a dll
8038 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8039 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8040 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8041 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8042 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8043 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8044 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8045 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8046 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8047 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8048
8049 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8050 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8051 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8052 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8053 select the dll instead of an import library.
8054
8055
8056 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8057 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8058
8059 @example
8060 libxxx.dll.a
8061 xxx.dll.a
8062 libxxx.a
8063 xxx.lib
8064 libxxx.lib
8065 cygxxx.dll (*)
8066 libxxx.dll
8067 xxx.dll
8068 @end example
8069
8070 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8071
8072 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8073 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8074 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8075 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8076 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8077
8078 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8079 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8080 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8081 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8082 could coexist on the same machine.
8083
8084 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8085 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8086 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8087
8088 @example
8089 bin/
8090 cygxxx.dll
8091 lib/
8092 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8093 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8094 @end example
8095
8096 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8097 done two ways:
8098
8099 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8100 @example
8101 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8102 @end example
8103
8104 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8105 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8106 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8107 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8108
8109 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8110 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8111 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8112 making the app/dll.
8113
8114 @example
8115 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8116 @end example
8117
8118 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8119
8120 @example
8121 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8122 @end example
8123
8124 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8125 perfectly legal
8126
8127 @example
8128 bin/
8129 cygxxx-5.dll
8130 lib/
8131 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8132 @end example
8133
8134 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8135 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8136 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8137
8138 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8139 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8140
8141 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8142 work with auto-imported data.
8143
8144 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8145 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8146 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8147 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8148 possible to do this without an import lib.
8149
8150 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8151 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8152 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8153 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8154
8155 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8156 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8157 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8158 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8159 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8160 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8161 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8162
8163 @item symbol aliasing
8164 @table @emph
8165 @item adding additional names
8166 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8167 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8168 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8169 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8170 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8171
8172 @example
8173 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8174
8175 EXPORTS
8176 foo
8177 _foo = foo
8178 @end example
8179
8180 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8181
8182 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8183 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8184
8185 @example
8186 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8187 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8188 @end example
8189
8190 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8191 symbols.
8192
8193 @item renaming symbols
8194 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8195 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8196 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8197 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8198 created). In the following example:
8199
8200 @example
8201 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8202
8203 EXPORTS
8204 _foo = foo
8205 @end example
8206
8207 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8208 @samp{_foo}.
8209 @end table
8210
8211 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8212 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8213 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8214 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8215 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8216 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8217 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8218 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8219 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8220 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8221 which is probably not what you wanted.
8222
8223 @cindex weak externals
8224 @item weak externals
8225 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8226 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8227 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8228 are three variants of weak externals:
8229 @itemize
8230 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8231 called lazy externals.
8232 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8233 This form is not presently implemented.
8234 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8235 implemented.
8236 @end itemize
8237 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8238 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8239 uses a default value.
8240
8241 @cindex aligned common symbols
8242 @item aligned common symbols
8243 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8244 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8245 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8246 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8247 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8248 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8249 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8250 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8251
8252 @end table
8253
8254 @ifclear GENERIC
8255 @lowersections
8256 @end ifclear
8257 @end ifset
8258
8259 @ifset XTENSA
8260 @ifclear GENERIC
8261 @raisesections
8262 @end ifclear
8263
8264 @node Xtensa
8265 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8266
8267 @cindex Xtensa processors
8268 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8269 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8270 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8271 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8272 example, with the command:
8273
8274 @smallexample
8275 SECTIONS
8276 @{
8277 .text : @{
8278 *(.literal .text)
8279 @}
8280 @}
8281 @end smallexample
8282
8283 @noindent
8284 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8285 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8286 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8287 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8288 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8289 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8290 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8291
8292 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8293 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8294 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8295 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8296 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8297 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8298 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8299 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8300 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8301 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8302 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8303 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8304
8305 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8306 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8307 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8308 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8309 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8310 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8311 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8312 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8313 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8314 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8315 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8316 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8317 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8318 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8319
8320 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8321 control the linker:
8322
8323 @cindex Xtensa options
8324 @table @option
8325 @item --size-opt
8326 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8327 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8328 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8329 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8330 preserve the correctness of the code.
8331 @end table
8332
8333 @ifclear GENERIC
8334 @lowersections
8335 @end ifclear
8336 @end ifset
8337
8338 @ifclear SingleFormat
8339 @node BFD
8340 @chapter BFD
8341
8342 @cindex back end
8343 @cindex object file management
8344 @cindex object formats available
8345 @kindex objdump -i
8346 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8347 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8348 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8349 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8350 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8351 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8352 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8353 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8354 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8355
8356 @cindex BFD requirements
8357 @cindex requirements for BFD
8358 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8359 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8360 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8361 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8362 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8363 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8364 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8365
8366 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8367 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8368 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8369 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8370
8371 @menu
8372 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8373 @end menu
8374
8375 @node BFD outline
8376 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8377 @cindex opening object files
8378 @include bfdsumm.texi
8379 @end ifclear
8380
8381 @node Reporting Bugs
8382 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8383 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8384 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8385
8386 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8387
8388 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8389 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8390 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8391 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8392 @command{ld}.
8393
8394 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8395 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8396
8397 @menu
8398 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8399 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8400 @end menu
8401
8402 @node Bug Criteria
8403 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8404 @cindex bug criteria
8405
8406 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8407
8408 @itemize @bullet
8409 @cindex fatal signal
8410 @cindex linker crash
8411 @cindex crash of linker
8412 @item
8413 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8414 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8415
8416 @cindex error on valid input
8417 @item
8418 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8419
8420 @cindex invalid input
8421 @item
8422 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8423 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8424 object files are correct.
8425
8426 @item
8427 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8428 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8429 @end itemize
8430
8431 @node Bug Reporting
8432 @section How to Report Bugs
8433 @cindex bug reports
8434 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8435
8436 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8437 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8438 recommend you contact that organization first.
8439
8440 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8441 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8442 distribution.
8443
8444 @ifset BUGURL
8445 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8446 @value{BUGURL}.
8447 @end ifset
8448
8449 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8450 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8451 fact or leave it out, state it!
8452
8453 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8454 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8455 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8456 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8457 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8458 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8459 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8460 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8461 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8462 and the most helpful.
8463
8464 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8465 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8466 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8467
8468 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8469 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8470 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8471 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8472
8473 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8474
8475 @itemize @bullet
8476 @item
8477 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8478 the @samp{--version} argument.
8479
8480 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8481 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8482
8483 @item
8484 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8485 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8486
8487 @item
8488 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8489 version number.
8490
8491 @item
8492 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8493 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8494
8495 @item
8496 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8497 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8498 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8499 sufficient.
8500
8501 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8502 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8503
8504 @item
8505 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8506 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8507 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8508 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8509 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8510 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8511 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8512 attachments are best.
8513
8514 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8515 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8516 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8517 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8518 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8519
8520 @item
8521 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8522 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8523
8524 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8525 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8526 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8527 a chance to make a mistake.
8528
8529 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8530 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8531 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8532 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8533 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8534 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8535 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8536 any conclusion from our observations.
8537
8538 @item
8539 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8540 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8541 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8542 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8543 context, not by line number.
8544
8545 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8546 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8547 @end itemize
8548
8549 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8550
8551 @itemize @bullet
8552 @item
8553 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8554
8555 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8556 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8557 changes will not affect it.
8558
8559 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8560 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8561 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8562 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8563
8564 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8565 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8566 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8567 less time, and so on.
8568
8569 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8570 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8571
8572 @item
8573 A patch for the bug.
8574
8575 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8576 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8577 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8578 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8579
8580 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8581 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8582 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8583 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8584 fixed.
8585
8586 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8587 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8588 help us to understand.
8589
8590 @item
8591 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8592
8593 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8594 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8595 @end itemize
8596
8597 @node MRI
8598 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8599 @cindex MRI compatibility
8600 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8601 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8602 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8603 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8604 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8605 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8606 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8607
8608 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8609 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8610 features to make use of them.
8611
8612 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8613 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8614
8615 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8616 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8617 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8618 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8619 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8620
8621 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8622
8623 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8624 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8625 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8626
8627 @table @code
8628 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8629 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8630 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8631 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8632 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8633 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8634 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8635 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8636 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8637 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8638 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8639
8640 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8641 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8642 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8643 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8644
8645 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8646
8647 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8648 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8649 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8650 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8651
8652 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8653 @item BASE @var{expression}
8654 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8655 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8656
8657 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8658 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8659 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8660 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8661
8662 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8663 @item END
8664 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8665
8666 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8667 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8668 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8669 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8670
8671 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8672 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8673 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8674 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8675
8676 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8677 same line, with no change in its effect.
8678
8679 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8680 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8681 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8682 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8683 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8684 command line.
8685
8686 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8687 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8688 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8689 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8690 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8691
8692 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8693 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8694 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8695 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8696 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8697 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8698 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8699 file, in the order specified.
8700
8701 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8702 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8703 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8704 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8705 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8706 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8707
8708 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8709 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8710 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8711 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8712 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8713 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8714 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8715 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8716 @end table
8717
8718 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8719 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8720 @include fdl.texi
8721
8722 @node LD Index
8723 @unnumbered LD Index
8724
8725 @printindex cp
8726
8727 @tex
8728 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8729 % meantime:
8730 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8731 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8732 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8733 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8734 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8735 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8736 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8737 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8738 \page\colophon
8739 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8740 @end tex
8741
8742 @bye